22.01.2014 Views

Twice a Year Scientific Journal

Twice a Year Scientific Journal

Twice a Year Scientific Journal

SHOW MORE
SHOW LESS

Create successful ePaper yourself

Turn your PDF publications into a flip-book with our unique Google optimized e-Paper software.

PUBLISHER<br />

Institute of Economic Sciences<br />

12 Zmaj Jovina str<br />

11000 Belgrade<br />

Serbia<br />

www.ien.bg.ac.rs<br />

Vol. 43 No. 1-2<br />

<strong>Twice</strong> a <strong>Year</strong> <strong>Scientific</strong> <strong>Journal</strong><br />

ISSN 1821-2573 = Economic Analysis<br />

UDC 33,33<br />

COBISS.SR-ID 169576460<br />

First Published 1967<br />

EDITOR-IN-CHIEF<br />

Mirjana Radović-Marković<br />

Institute of Economic Sciences, Belgrade<br />

ASSOCIATE EDITOR<br />

Božo Drašković<br />

Institute of Economic Sciences, Belgrade<br />

EDITORIAL BOARD<br />

Aleksandra Bradić~Martinović<br />

Institute of Economic Sciences, Belgrade<br />

Ivana Domazet<br />

Institute of Economic Sciences, Belgrade<br />

Božo Drašković<br />

Institute of Economic Sciences, Belgrade<br />

Dejan Erić<br />

Institute of Economic Sciences, Belgrade<br />

Hasan Hanić<br />

Belgrade Banking Academy, Belgrade<br />

Dušan Kostić<br />

Institute of Economic Sciences, Belgrade<br />

Gradimir Kožetinac<br />

Belgrade Banking Academy, Belgrade<br />

Jelica Minić<br />

Regional Cooperation Council - Sarajevo, Bosna<br />

and Herzegovina<br />

Srdjan Redžepagić<br />

Institute of Economic Sciences, Belgrade<br />

Ivan Stošić<br />

Institute of Economic Sciences, Belgrade<br />

Jovan Zubović<br />

Institute of Economic Sciences, Belgrade<br />

Joăo Sousa Andrade<br />

Universtiy of Coimbra, Portugal<br />

Claude Berthomieu<br />

University of Nice - Sofia Antipolis, France<br />

John Board<br />

ICMA Center, University of Reading, UK<br />

Giuseppe Dutto<br />

University of Torino, Italy<br />

Jean~Paul Guichard<br />

University of Nice - Sofia Antipolis, France<br />

Saša Popović<br />

University of Podgorica, Montenegro<br />

Xavier Richet<br />

University of Paris, France<br />

Adnan Rovčanin<br />

Univesrity of Sarajevo, Bosnia and Herzegovina<br />

Mitja Pavliha<br />

BDO EOS, Ljubljana, Slovenia<br />

Vasileios Kallinterakis<br />

University of Durham, Department of<br />

Economics and Finance, UK


EDITORIAL OFFICE<br />

c/o Institute of Economic Sciences<br />

12, Zmaj Jovina str.<br />

11000 Belgrade<br />

Serbia<br />

Tel. +381 11 2622-357; 2629-960<br />

Fax: +381 (11) 2181~471<br />

www.ien.bg.ac.rs/ea<br />

eaoffice@ien.bg.ac.rs<br />

PUBLISHING BOARD<br />

Radoje Zečević<br />

The College of Tourism, Belgrade<br />

Drago Cvijanović<br />

Institute of Agricultural Economics, Belgrade<br />

Vlastimir Vuković<br />

The College of Tourism, Belgrade<br />

Dragan Milinković Fimon<br />

Belgrade Banking Academy, Belgrade<br />

Srdjan Redžepagić<br />

Institute of Economic Sciences, Belgrade<br />

Mirjana Radović-Marković<br />

Institute of Economic Sciences, Belgrade<br />

Božo Drašković<br />

Institute of Economic Sciences, Belgrade<br />

Gradimir Kožetinac<br />

Belgrade Banking Academy, Belgrade<br />

Dejan Erić<br />

Institute of Economic Sciences, Belgrade<br />

Ivan Stošić<br />

Institute of Economic Sciences, Belgrade<br />

Slavenko Grgurević<br />

Institute of Economic Sciences, Belgrade<br />

Dušan Kostić<br />

Institute of Economic Sciences, Belgrade<br />

Zvonko Brnjas<br />

Belgrade Banking Academy, Belgrade<br />

Petar Đukić<br />

Faculty of Technology and Metallurgy, Belgrade<br />

Slobodan Aćimović<br />

Faculty of Economics, Belgrade<br />

Hasan Hanić<br />

Belgrade Banking Academy, Belgrade<br />

BUSINESS SECRETARY<br />

Aleksandar Zdravković<br />

Institute of Economic Sciences, Belgrade<br />

aleksandar.zdravkovic@ien.bg.ac.rs<br />

PUBLISHED BY<br />

SP Print, Novi Sad<br />

100 copies<br />

Our journal is indexed in international databases such as: EBSCO Publishing Inc,<br />

GESIS Leibniz-Institute for the Social Sciences and Ullibe University.<br />

Manuscripts are understood to be substantially new and have not been previously published in whole<br />

(excluding conference preceding). Publisher has the copyright to all published articles<br />

Copyright© 2010 by Institute of Economic Sciences Belgrade, All rights reserved.


C O N T E N T S<br />

The Upsurgence of Clusters in the Light of Globalization.................................................... 9-24<br />

Matray Myriam<br />

The Analysis of Long Run Growth Oriented Fiscal Policy.................................................. 25-33<br />

Erős Adrienn<br />

Economic Assessment of Selected Bank Mergers in the Central-East Europe Region in<br />

Comparison with Developed Countries........................................................................................ 34-43<br />

Tej Jakub<br />

Matrix Theory Application in the Bootstrapping Method for the Term Structure of Interest<br />

Rates................................................................................................................................................. 44-49<br />

Glova Jozef<br />

Method of Banks Valuation ........................................................................................................... 50-60<br />

Horvátová Eva<br />

Future Stance of Currencies in the International Monetary System .................................. 61-69<br />

Kotlebova Jana<br />

Differences Between Harmonized Indices of Consumer Prices and Consumer Price Indices<br />

in Selected Countries ...................................................................................................................... 70-82<br />

Milecová Zuzana<br />

Do Minimum Wage Changes Influence Employment? ............................................................... 83-90<br />

Vokorokosová Renatá<br />

Information Resources for Financial Monitoring in Enterprises........................................ 91-98<br />

Kościelniak Helena<br />

Business Relations in Reverse Logistics Outsourcing ........................................................ 99-107<br />

Grabara Janusz, Kot Sebastian<br />

Social Aspects in Buyer-Supplier Relationships of SMEs in Hungary ......................... 108-116<br />

Gubik Andrea<br />

Competition in Banking Market in Slovakia...................................................................... 117-125<br />

Střelecká Zdenka<br />

Innovation Policy Based on Network Paradigm ................................................................ 126-133<br />

Pachura Piotr<br />

Foreign Direct Investment and Global Economic Crisis .................................................. 134-141<br />

Ślusarczyk Beata<br />

Book Reviw:<br />

Inflation and Unemployment ................................................................................................ 142-143<br />

Lovre Ivan, Perić Mladen


Note from the Editor-in-Chief<br />

I am pleased to be able to present this special issue of Economic<br />

Analysis which is devoted to <strong>Scientific</strong> Conference “Economic Prospect in<br />

the Second Decade of the 21 st Century” (14. – 15. April 2010), organized<br />

by Belgrade Banking Academy and Institute of Economic Science in<br />

Belgrade. Furthermore, I am glad to announce that almost articles for this<br />

issue have been collected by Dr Jozef Glova from Faculty of Economics,<br />

Technical university in Košice, Slovakia whom I invited to be our guest<br />

editor and help me in selecting articles for the first issue of Economic<br />

Analysis in 2010. It is another step forward in strengthening cooperation between our partner<br />

institutions. At the same time, work on this issue is more closely connected us with colleagues from<br />

other Faculties of Economics within V4 and countries of South Eastern Europe who provided special<br />

contributions to our peer <strong>Journal</strong> with their high quality papers.<br />

Thanks to everyone for their cooperation with the hope that it will continue in the future.<br />

Prof. dr Mirjana Radović Marković<br />

Editor-in-Chief<br />

Economic Analysis


Guest Editor’s Notes<br />

The current volume of Economic Analysis provides a collection of<br />

original scientific papers and scientific reviews covering a wide range of topics<br />

from small and medium enterprises (SME) research to price stability and<br />

employment research, business logistics and business valuation.<br />

The most of articles were originated through the international cooperation<br />

in education and science of Visegrad Group countries and Serbia in<br />

the field of the Investment, Banking and Business, especially oriented on the<br />

small and medium enterprises. This scientific collaboration is currently cofinanced<br />

by Visegrad Strategic Program project “Strengthening the educational<br />

and scientific collaboration among Faculties of Economics within V4 and countries of South Eastern<br />

Europe” of International Visegrad Fund.<br />

Within the frame of this project we have slowly but surely established international educational<br />

and scientific network of teachers and researchers from Czech Republic, Hungary, Poland, Serbia and<br />

Slovakia (see www.ekf.tuke.sk/ivf to recognize all eight project partners involved). The network<br />

coordinates the mobility of faculties´ project personnel; prepares workshops and meetings on best<br />

practices in educational and scientific areas within topics like Investment, Banking and Business.<br />

We are also pleased to present the most of here published papers personally during the<br />

International <strong>Scientific</strong> Conference “Economic Prospect in the Second Decade of the 21 st Century”<br />

(14. – 15. April 2010) organized by Belgrade Banking Academy and Institute of Economic Science in<br />

Belgrade.<br />

This current volume of Economic Analysis journal covers wide range of economic topics, there<br />

you are<br />

Erős’s paper focuses on the growth theory and discusses the question whether or not<br />

government policies can be used to influence the long run growth rate of the economy. The author<br />

summarize the theoretical and empirical literature of the relationship between fiscal policy and long<br />

run economic growth shortly on the one hand, and on the other hand used the parameter estimates of a<br />

third generation study of developed countries to evaluate the fiscal policy actions taken in Hungary<br />

and in Ireland. She also mapped the explanation for the differences in these two countries’ reactions to<br />

some of the similar fiscal policy changes.<br />

The next three contributions are aimed at theory of investment and business valuation,<br />

especially applied in the financial sector. First one by Horvátová proceeded with bank and financial<br />

institution valuation enlarging the last contributions in Theory of Investment Value by R. C. Merton<br />

using the risk-neutral valuation model and its variants. Very close to this topic is the contribution<br />

focuses on the bank mergers in the Central-East Europe region. In the second one the author Tej<br />

examined and analyzed differences in financial results in the Central and Eastern Europe region in<br />

comparison with developed markets. Finally, in more theoretical oriented paper by Glova the author<br />

attempts to address key issue in designing algorithm for estimating of yield curve. The author<br />

proposed the application of matrix theory in yield curve points estimation.<br />

In her scientific review Kotlebová discusses the future stance of currencies in the International<br />

Monetary System. She mentioned the higher creation of savings in emerging economies compared to<br />

developed countries; higher investments of developed economies in comparison with developing


8<br />

Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 7-8)<br />

countries; the current account deficit of the balance of payments in developed countries as opposed to<br />

the current account surplus of the balance of payments in emerging economies create new conditions<br />

for future stance of currencies in the international monetary system. She also highlighted the main<br />

trends in the future development the IMF.<br />

Milecová’s article analyzes the differences between the harmonized indices of consumer prices<br />

and the national consumer price indices on the theoretical as well as on the practical levels. Author<br />

deals with defining the differences between the indices not only in the euro area and in V4-countries,<br />

but also in Serbia. The main differences are geographic and population coverage and owner-occupied<br />

housing. Using statistical methods the author test hypothesis of the difference between different the<br />

indices measuring price stability.<br />

Vokorokosová in her paper addresses the influence and dependency between minimum wage<br />

increase and the amount of employed people. This article picks out minimum wage as an important<br />

part of employment research investigating two files; the number of working people aged 15 – 64 and<br />

all working labours.<br />

Kościelniak reviews and analyzes information resources for financial monitoring in<br />

enterprises.<br />

Grabara’s article focused on business realations in reverse logistics outsourcing, as key aspect<br />

of the cost reduction used in companies during fighting for survival, keeping or increases in sales<br />

levels and profits. More and more often observed tendencies to concentrate commercial and production<br />

companies lead to rise of demand for outsourcing in a reverse logistics chain.<br />

Gubik’s paper intends to introduce the reader to the characteristics of supplier-purchaser<br />

relationships of small- and medium sized enterprises, based on an empirical research’s experiences<br />

using the questionnaire and its statistical evaluation. According to author’s opinion, we can draw<br />

conclusions on the intention to cooperate concerning the nature of the buyer-supplier relationships of<br />

companies, so a wide range of information can be concluded on small- and medium sized enterprises’<br />

partnerships.<br />

Please allow me to express my sincere appreciation to Prof. dr Mirjana Radović Marković for<br />

confidence. Last but not least I want to thank all contributors and reviewers for their excellent work<br />

that they have done.<br />

Jozef Glova


ORIGINAL SCIENTIFIC PAPER<br />

The Upsurgence of Clusters in the Light of Globalization<br />

Matray Myriam * , Institut d’Administration des Entreprises IAE - Université Jean Moulin<br />

Lyon 3 Centre de echerche Magellan - Equipe Euristik, France<br />

UDC: 005.44 JEL: O21<br />

ABSTRACT – Clusters, as system of companies anchored in a region, contribute and ensure the<br />

long-term world competitiveness of national production. The object of this paper is to demonstrate that<br />

globalization opens restrictions on growth potential, which can be exploited by the clusters in order to<br />

position themselves on the world markets by maximizing on the benefits of global competition. Thus,<br />

clusters use the advantages of globalization (including a myriad of networks), channeling the negative<br />

effects the latter may cause (taking as an example industrial espionage which has become increasingly<br />

prevalent). Clusters can therefore be a means for firms to be competitive at a time of globalization and,<br />

at the same time, be integrated in the process. Portraying a policy of growth, most European countries<br />

– such as France - have adopted this new industrial policy, which is being introduced in its turn in<br />

some Mediterranean countries (like Morocco for instance).<br />

KEY WORDS: cluster, globalization, competitiveness, knowledge sharing, networks<br />

Introduction<br />

Globalization has released potential for growth; this process is conducive to the<br />

accumulation of skills, knowledge sharing, the intensification of the networks (via<br />

Information and Communication Technology ICT), the synergy companies... Yet it puts the<br />

companies in a new competitive “playground”. In the light of this, businesses adapt<br />

themselves, and new industrial policies are put in place to maximize on the process of<br />

globalization without being caught out by the competition it may generate.<br />

The clusters development policy comes into the framework of. The challenge of these<br />

clusters is to geographically group together firms, public and private research, laboratories<br />

and training organizations engaged in a partnership approach to create synergies in order to<br />

build innovative cooperative projects recognized nationally &/or globally.<br />

The potential benefit of grouping together companies is not a new invention. Marshall 1<br />

described this process as “industrial district” and used the term “industrial atmosphere” to<br />

describe the dynamism generated by cooperation and exchange of know-how within the<br />

district. Since then, Local Productive Systems (SPL) have been organized following the<br />

concept of the industrial district in Prato, near Florence in Tuscany, which constitutes the<br />

first empirical study 2 on this type of industrial concentration by G. Becattini 3 at the end<br />

*<br />

Address: Roanne 42 300 (France), e-mail: myriam.matray@gmail.com<br />

1<br />

Marshall, A. (1890), Principles of Economics, London: Macmillan.<br />

2<br />

In Italy this type of territorial industrial concentration was highlighted by G. Becattini, USA by<br />

A.Scott and France by C. Courlet.


10<br />

Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 9-24)<br />

1970s. Bories-Azeau and Loubès 4 highlight that there is a difference between the concept of<br />

Local Productive Systems SPL and clusters. SPLs were identified in 1997 by the CIADT<br />

(Interministerial committee for regional development) as “a group of companies and<br />

institutions geographically close who work together in the same field.” The afore mentioned<br />

authors write: “Unlike the centered networks, dominated by one or more large enterprise<br />

and clusters 5 , which are subject to a new industrial government strategy, the SPLs are closely<br />

linked local networks, where power is shared amongst their members and consist primarily<br />

of Small and medium size enterprises SMEs”. They also distinguish by their branch. An SPL<br />

is more oriented toward more traditional industries (textile...), unlike a cluster which<br />

specializes in industries with high added value requiring heavy investment (micro-nano<br />

technologies...).<br />

Figure 1. Definition of a cluster 6<br />

Firms<br />

Training centers<br />

Joint by 3 common goals:<br />

- Innovative projects<br />

- Partnership approach<br />

- International renown<br />

Public &/or private<br />

research<br />

The purpose of this paper is to underline the paradox that the cluster is an industrial<br />

policy to maintain national competitiveness arising from the adverse effects of globalization<br />

(relocation, the race for innovation, increased competitiveness, industrial espionage...), whilst<br />

wishing to position itself to face competition in the global market. Therefore the clusters<br />

adapt their development to globalization: first they take globalization to the advantage of<br />

their development, to then be integrated into the globalization to meet international<br />

competition. For these reasons, the “cluster industrial policy” is bolstered. It has been<br />

3<br />

Becattini, G. (1992), “Le District Marshallien : une notion socio-économique”, In Benko, G. and<br />

Lipietz, A. (1992), Les régions qui gagnent, Paris, PUF.<br />

4<br />

Bories-Azeau, I. and Loubès, A. (2007), “Emergence d’un acteur collectif territorial et réseau<br />

d’entreprises : l’exemple de CAMDIB”, Revue RECEMAP, October 2007.<br />

5<br />

// http://www.competitivite.gouv.fr. or: // http://www.observatoiredespoles.com/ and //<br />

http://polescompet.canalblog.com/<br />

6<br />

Source figure 1 : Carel, S. (2005), “La politique française de développement de réseaux d’entreprises<br />

localisés, Technopôles, SPL, pôles de compétitivité : quels enjeux pour les territoires ?”, La politique<br />

française de développement de réseaux d’entreprises localisés, Septièmes Rencontres de Théo Quant, January<br />

2005. // http://thema.univ-fcomte.fr/theoq/pdf/2005/Carel-theoquant05.pdf


Matray, M., The Upsurgence of Clusters, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No, 1-2, 9-24) 11<br />

established in Europe and is developing in Mediterranean countries because it is an<br />

alternative to international competition companies face daily.<br />

Globalization, the strength of clusters<br />

According to Michalet 7 C-A, “globalization is a multidimensional phenomenon, which<br />

encompasses three main elements: the development of trade and the relocating of<br />

production and financial movements. These three elements are interdependent.”<br />

Globalization releases growth potential, yet is causing positive and negative effects.<br />

Increased competitiveness is particularly favorable to consumers but it can also cause the<br />

collapse of a company which fails to stand up to the adversity of competition. Globalization<br />

allows to increase the panel of knowledge fostering innovation, but it can facilitate industrial<br />

espionage, fires the race for innovation and diverts traditional consumer goods in exchange<br />

for increasingly more high tech goods. Globalization has no borders; it is a-territorial which<br />

may cause an issue as to identification of territory. The list of positive and negative impacts<br />

of globalization is exhaustive. In our article we will put forward the core elements of<br />

globalization in clusters.<br />

The a-territoriality of globalization and the anchor-hold of clusters<br />

Paradoxically national &/or global clusters attach importance to the territory in which<br />

they are implanted; it reconciles the global and the local. This new industrial policy, which<br />

has been created to further global competitiveness, thinks “global” but acts “local”. Thus, the<br />

cluster will use the benefits of globalization advantageously to the extent of the networks, by<br />

applying “trade flows” 8 beyond borders, to develop itself.<br />

The agglomeration of enterprises<br />

Businesses in the field of information technology stand to gain by being able to access<br />

technological networks. The advantages constituted by network outsourcing increase by the<br />

number of users. Marshall defined this as non-pecuniary outsourcing which increases profit.<br />

This network outsourcing may explain a paradox: in general, Information and<br />

Communication Technology ICT allows to decentralize the relationship between producers<br />

and buyers, which should allow them to use the means of television as a more<br />

comprehensive tool of communication for instance video conferencing through webcams.<br />

Yet, ironically the tendency is for clusters to concentrate in agglomeration; taking as example<br />

operators, they will tend to seek zones where the demand is strongest and these are<br />

invariably high-density areas. The implantation of clusters takes into account these<br />

“centripetal forces” 9 to facilitate their integration into the territory in which they are to be<br />

located and for quicker development. In this sense, the network does not exclude the notion<br />

7<br />

Michalet, C-A. (2003), “Comptes rendus d’auditions, Mondialisation: une chance pour<br />

l’environnement ?”, 12 March 2003. // http://www.senat.fr/rap/r03-233/r03-23355.html<br />

8<br />

Term used to define an aspect of globalization by Michalet, C-A.<br />

9<br />

Reference to the ʺcentripetal forceʺ on the location of economic activity, analysis developed by<br />

Krugman, P.


12<br />

Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 9-24)<br />

of proximity. Colletis 10 , the specialist in geographical economics, highlights the fact that the<br />

connection of networks is not automatic between the different actors if they do not know<br />

each other, as they need to be built on trust between them. There is in fact no need, indeed, to<br />

be close to innovate: the development of communities of shared practices around the free<br />

software is an illustration, but it facilitates cooperation.<br />

The identity of a cluster<br />

Whereas globalization comes along with a decline of the idea of Nation state, the cluster<br />

integrates into a dynamics of co-construction between the territory which it is implanted and<br />

itself. However, it is not sufficient for the cooperation of the organization of the cluster, it<br />

must be perceived as a process in the construction of an identity so that each member feels<br />

totally integrated in the project. This identity is primarily based on the construction of social<br />

links through reciprocal exchange of rules and values. This sharing of rules and values in an<br />

entrepreneurial environment is particularly reflected in the third part of the following<br />

sections of the economic intelligence which encompasses:<br />

• Industrial espionage with the aim to gain pertinent strategic information,<br />

• The protection of storage of information heritage.<br />

• And the manner of expression which influences the propagation of information or<br />

rules of conduct. The latter can be referred to as “formal capital” as defined by Y.<br />

Bertacchini and L. Oueslati, which they describe as a set of rules and common<br />

procedures (published in “Entre information et processus de communication:<br />

l’intelligence territorial”, 2003. // http: // www.isdm.org).<br />

This third point highlights the role of the formal structure, actually the efficient<br />

functioning of a cluster requires:<br />

• Common opportunities: the ability to work on a common project being the<br />

underlining condition to be integrated as a member of the community,<br />

• The ability of the members to cooperate determined by the capacity of the<br />

members to organize themselves,<br />

• And common rules.<br />

The adoption of common rules will allow a high level of reliability favorable to collective<br />

research, which will consequently lead to the competitiveness of the cluster.<br />

The communal territory plays its role within the pole, in the following quotation Thoenig<br />

J-C. and Waldman C. 11 bring to light the importance of the common values passed on by the<br />

specific geographical area: “the success and the survival of a company lie in its capacity to<br />

conquer, to define and to develop a territorial and economic community. A territory is<br />

established by multiple stakeholders (customers, suppliers, employees, civic associations,<br />

circles of experts, etc.) whom the company federates around its project, by means of common<br />

values and interests, shared identities, and lasting partnerships. The reference to its territory<br />

constitutes its code of conduct”. Everyone identifies with their own roots; the expression of<br />

10<br />

Colletis, G. (2005), “Entreprises et territoires : proximités et développement local”, published in:<br />

Entreprises, réseaux et territoires, 22 March 2005.<br />

11<br />

Thoenig, J-C. and Waldman, C. (2005), De l’entreprise marchande à l’entreprise marquante, Editions<br />

d’Organisation.


Matray, M., The Upsurgence of Clusters, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No, 1-2, 9-24) 13<br />

Blaise Pascal, “the Truth lies on this side of the Pyrenees, the wrongs beyond”, or another<br />

common expression, “to each their own truth”, both reflect this territorial culture and<br />

illustrate the relativism which is a doctrine according to which no one opinion is absolutely<br />

true, each bearing meaning solely with regards to an active point of reference. This point of<br />

reference which can be an individual, a company, a culture, an industrial branch (chemistry,<br />

textile, toys & games...), a place. These traditional forms of territorial anchoring seal the<br />

future in such way that the crisis of a company becomes the crisis of the territory, and the<br />

decline of an organization rhymes with social drama (Perrat, and Zimmermann, 2003) such<br />

as the decline of the textile SPL in Roanne.<br />

As has been noted through the notion of identity, rules, and skills specific to the cluster,<br />

its identity shapes itself by ʺthe identification with the internal environment and the<br />

differentiation with the external environmentʺ (Bouchet Y., Bertacchini Y., Noël L.). Thus, the<br />

adherence to the cluster can be explained by the shape of the social networks it is made up<br />

of.<br />

Between a-territoriality and territoriality<br />

The cluster can be assimilated to a specific territory, a place. The place becomes a pole, a<br />

center connected with other centers. Jean-Louis Guigou, a delegate to land settlement and to<br />

regional function DATAR (from 1997 till 2002), highlighted the role of the territory faced<br />

with globalization by quoting: ““if globalization imposes itself on us, territorialisation<br />

depends on us”. This quotation, which I often used, is somewhat simplistic.” But it<br />

underlines this powerful dialectic between the global and the local that some American<br />

academics illustrated through the concept of “glocalization”. If our societies have indeed<br />

considerably increased their interdependence and their flow of exchange, and if companies<br />

have become more and more international and sometimes have given the impression of<br />

nomadism, territories are nevertheless becoming more and more strategic supports of the<br />

contemporary economic development, if they know how to organize themselves.” 12 In this<br />

way, the cluster integrates this notion of territory. Its location is carefully chosen and is<br />

proportional to its renown. It is also assimilated to the city in which it is to be implanted. So<br />

the cluster will gradually be made reference to by the city of the pole and vice-versa. The<br />

success of the pole will also be assimilated to the success of the city in which it is implanted<br />

as the latter benefits from positive externalities.<br />

Thus, the cluster channels globalization by offering it a specific space. This territorial<br />

anchorage allows it to build up a physical and moral reason in order to eventually project<br />

itself on the global markets.<br />

The accumulation of skills in globalization and the sharing of knowledge<br />

within the cluster<br />

According to the latest work of Michalet 13 the traffic of goods, capital and technology is<br />

more and more intra industrial and intra enterprise. That is to say outer market. The cluster<br />

integrates this idea and favors the collaborative research.<br />

12<br />

Foreword by Guigou, J-L., In Loinger, G. and Nemery, J-C. (1998), “Recomposition et<br />

développement des territoires, enjeux économiques, processus, acteurs”, L’Harmattan.<br />

13<br />

Michalet, C-A. (2007), Mondialisation, la grande rupture, La Découverte.


14<br />

Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 9-24)<br />

Cluster: factor for uniting agents<br />

This bringing together of actors, companies, researchers... is made all the easier as<br />

globalization allows a stake in their network, their research (with the example of the portals<br />

of information) and even if they come from different countries. It is the materialization of<br />

“brainstorming”, making to unite a diversity of agents coming from different backgrounds<br />

with the objective to create common motor driving innovative projects through the clusters.<br />

Actually, one of the first factors of success of a cluster is the joint presence on a common<br />

geographical location with public or private research centers and companies specialized in<br />

high technologies as well as local economic actors. The aim being to facilitate the exchange of<br />

information between these actors in order to set up a process of communication by<br />

appropriate networks with the intention to transferring of skills and diffusing innovation.<br />

The pole functions with a logic of collective intelligence 14 , catalyst of collective wealth,<br />

sharing of knowledge: essential elements to facilitate and to activate research upon which<br />

this entrepreneurial culture is founded. This collaborative research generates innovation<br />

aiming for competitiveness on a national or international level. However, it is to be<br />

emphasized that the collective intelligence is a perpetual process 15 and the information<br />

passed on in this way is the conveyor of competitiveness because it represents the strategic<br />

information, which belongs to the pole in question and to none other. The challenge is to<br />

constantly try to acquire new information in the advent of scientific breakthroughs.<br />

The sharing of the knowledge in the lap of the cluster<br />

Globalization and in particular ICT globalization gives everyone access to the required<br />

data bases, but these latter ones will only become information once they have been treated<br />

and they will only constitute knowledge once they have been assimilated and retranscribed<br />

by way of strategic decisions for the future of the pole. Amongst the advantages of a cluster<br />

is the sharing of information. Zimmermann puts forward the following characteristic within<br />

firms: the greater the degree of sharing (intervention of a large number of groups in the same<br />

scheme), the better is the ʺalchemyʺ of the functioning of the pole. The creation of the<br />

network is not immediate; trust is indispensable between the members all the more as not<br />

the whole of the information can be passed on by ICT. As a matter of fact, explicit knowledge<br />

can be transmitted by distance, whereas the implicit knowledge can only be conveyed face to<br />

14<br />

Collective intelligence “is specifically to enhance the diversity of knowledge, skills and ideas which<br />

are in a community and to organize this diversity of knowledge, skills and ideas which are present in<br />

a community and to organize this diversity in a creative and productive dialogue”. Quote of Zara, O.<br />

(2005), “Le management de l’intelligence collective: vers une nouvelle gouvernance”, M2 éditions,<br />

2005, In Knauf, A. (2006), “Le rôle des acteurs dans un dispositif régional d’intelligence économique:<br />

La place de l’informédiaire en tant que médiateur et animateur du dispositif” 2006. //<br />

http://hal.inria.fr/docs/00/10/73/12/PDF/knauf_numeroIE2006_corrige.pdf<br />

15<br />

Zartarian, M., Centraliens, November 1998, In Carayon, B. (2003), Intelligence économique,<br />

compétitivité et cohésion sociale, La Documentation Française, p. 111 : “Economic intelligence has<br />

fundamentally three main vocations: - Control and protection of scientific, technological and<br />

competitive storage of information heritage - Detention of threats and opportunities that the company<br />

may face - Constitution of influence strategies for the companies. The process is continuous,<br />

permanent and heuristics, with the aim to improve the competitiveness of the company by giving it<br />

the means to know and understand its environment to illuminate its decisions.”


Matray, M., The Upsurgence of Clusters, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No, 1-2, 9-24) 15<br />

face. Whilst ICT, IE tools, should logically amplify the functioning of a virtual economic<br />

system, the reality is quite the contrary: interpersonal communication or “face to face”<br />

remains essential as is apparent in the structure of a pole. It begs the question as to how to<br />

allow the exchange of strategic information in this competitive environment? ICT networks<br />

are easily seen through, “pirated”, by the same token “face to face” remains an IE tool in the<br />

same way as ICT. In that way the interest in a neutral public space contributes to the process<br />

of the IE: restaurants, cafeteria... often in these places, described by I.N. Fisher as “social<br />

spaces” for informal meetings with implicit exchanges. The paradox of the “IE is to be<br />

immaterial and remote and yet close to all” 16 . The most expressive example remains that of<br />

“The City” (London’s financial center) where bankers and traders daily exchange strategic<br />

information (economic surveillance...). This process, as long as it continues, ensures the life<br />

of London’s financial market. Neutral public areas are indispensable just like trust, which<br />

has to reign between the agents. Information, knowledge and inventions have to be brought<br />

together and protected; therefore trust is fundamental within the cluster (Bertacchini Y.,<br />

Bouchet Y., and Noël L.) 17 . According to Bertacchini Y. and Herbaux P.: “A territorial<br />

intelligence is an organizational culture based on sharing and treatment of the signals from<br />

the economic actors who are destined to supply decisive information to the leaders, at the<br />

appropriate time”. Mohellebi D. and Dou H. (2007) highlight that the passing on of<br />

information springs from a corporate culture, that is to say to sensitize and motivate the<br />

members. The clusters shape strategic places of exchanges of information, thanks to the<br />

neutral spaces where trust reigns and gradually establish a business atmosphere and a<br />

corporate culture resting on exchange and cooperation. These phenomena mobilize the<br />

exchange of decisive information in the clusters which constitute a “competitive advantage”<br />

(Porter, 1990).<br />

The storage of information heritage of the cluster and globalization<br />

The clusters are connected to other places via ICT. In fact, with globalization, not to be<br />

marginalized, the adoption of ICTs is fundamental. The ICT, the main tools of Economic<br />

Intelligence IE, are defined as all the techniques applied in the treatment and the<br />

transmission of information, mainly computing, Internet and telecommunications. Just as the<br />

pole benefits from a national and international renown by appropriation of the ICT. The<br />

clusters need broadband telecommunication networks and all other contributions of the ICTs<br />

in order to function and develop themselves. ICTs also allow potential market expansion<br />

(electronic commerce). The globalization of ICTs has nevertheless its limits as far as safety<br />

and ethical terms are concerned. In the event IE intervenes to protect storage of information<br />

heritage. Thus, the ICTs are limitated as regards to the exchange of information in<br />

competitive environment. Indeed, Bouchet Y., Bertacchini Y., and Noël L., note that trust is a<br />

process built without experience and consequently is contingent upon the safeguard of<br />

information. Furthermore, authors like Ivan Samson, observe that SMEs implanted in a<br />

16<br />

Author’s quote<br />

17<br />

Bouchet, Y. and Bertacchini, Y. and Noël, L. (2008), “Construire la confiance dans les échanges<br />

numériques, cas dans un pôle de compétitivité”, ISDM Informations, Savoirs, Décisions & Médiations,<br />

3 rd quarter 2008.


16<br />

Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 9-24)<br />

territory which is holder of positive externalities continue to develop strategies for<br />

competition and cooperation 18 amongst themselves.<br />

These lines of thought demonstrate the interest of clusters which wisely use globalization<br />

to maximize on its own development. The cluster channels the negative effects globalization<br />

may cause (absence of identity status due to the a - territoriality; the skepticism of the<br />

exchange of strategic information via ICT, hence the interest of face to face; the fear of<br />

espionage hence the need for the pole to restore confidence and security of information) and<br />

uses the benefits globalization provides (a myriad of networks, globalization of ICT and its<br />

absence of virtual borders). Gradually the new industrial policy of clusters has proven its<br />

strength in the light of globalization and plays the role of a policy for growth to gain the<br />

required competitiveness to integrate itself in the stream of globalization.<br />

The industrial policy of a cluster<br />

The objective of this policy is twofold; internal development of the territory in which it is<br />

located and external development namely:<br />

• Disseminate innovation (F. Perroux) in the territory in which the cluster is located,<br />

develop territorial economic activity<br />

• Promote competitiveness national and worldwide renown.<br />

Thus, in order to achieve the objectives of the pole what matters, according to J.<br />

Savatier 19 , is the will for putting in place networking actors, yet this will is evolutionary, just<br />

like social networks which make up the pole. Thus, according to Edward S. et al (2004)<br />

“networks experience endogenous development related to the transformation of links,<br />

objectives and members [...] but also changes in the external environment.” To adapt to these<br />

changes and promote cooperation EI is fundamental as it maintains the renewal of<br />

information on a daily basis in order to have data updated through the process of spying<br />

being conducive to research. EI also maintains the notion of trust through the protection of<br />

storage of information heritage. As an extension to the first part, the emphasis will be on the<br />

cluster as a component of integration into the globalization process.<br />

The objectives of an industrial policy of clusters as illustrated in France<br />

Thus, in order to assimilate these economic changes associated with globalization an<br />

industrial policy focused on the territory was established by the CIACT (Interministerial<br />

Committee for Planning and Competitiveness in Territories). From 2005 to 2007, 71 clusters<br />

were officially recognized as such in France, amongst which 7 were distinguished as world<br />

clusters and 10 as potential world ones.<br />

18<br />

Bouchet, Y., Bertacchini, Y. and Noël, L. (2008), “Construire la confiance dans les échanges<br />

numériques, cas dans un pôle de compétitivité”, ISDM Informations, Savoirs, Décisions & Médiations,<br />

3 rd quarter 2008.<br />

19<br />

Savatier, J. (2007), “ Table-ronde d’ouverture “l’innovation et l’anticipation des mutations<br />

économiques et sociales : perspectives européenne”” in “innovation et anticipation des mutations<br />

économiques et sociales”, Seminar organized by the European Commission, Diact and DGEFP,<br />

Bordeaux, 22-24 October 2007.


Matray, M., The Upsurgence of Clusters, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No, 1-2, 9-24) 17<br />

History of the establishment of clusters; new industrial strategy of government.<br />

Figure 2. History of the establishment of clusters<br />

2002 Implementation of a strategic committee by Jean-Pierre Raffarin CIADT of 13<br />

December 2002.<br />

2003 Establishment of an ʺindustrialʺ working group<br />

2004 Datar Report – “France, an industrial power”- February<br />

Blanc Report - ʺFor an ecosystem of growthʺ - March<br />

Financial bill for 2005 presented by Nicolas Sarkozy (Art. 24)<br />

CIADT of 14 September 2004<br />

Call for presentation of projects of ʺclustersʺ - November<br />

2005 Closure of the call for presentation of projects - 28 February 2005<br />

Completion of inquiry by technical experts of projects - May 9<br />

Establishment of the Group of qualified actors - May 16<br />

Proposal of the Interministerial Working Group to Government - end June<br />

CIADT of 12 July 2005 – Official recognition of the 67 cluster projects<br />

CIADT of 14 October 2005 - Validation of draft contracts and field of R & D.<br />

Decree of 14 October 2005 – “Interministerial Committee for Planning and<br />

development of territories” CIADT is renamed “Interministerial Committee<br />

for Planning and Competitiveness in Territories” CIACT.<br />

2007 5 July 2007, 71 clusters are officially recognized<br />

Source: Jacquet, N. and Darmon, D. (2005), “Les pôles de compétitivité. Le modèle français”,<br />

Documentation française, coll. Etudes n°5225.<br />

Criteria of quality selected for agreement of cluster<br />

F. Leroy 20 , head of Mission, member of the working group ʺclustersʺ, Management of<br />

entreprises, MINEFI, outlines the main objectives of clusters namely:<br />

• Strengthen competitiveness of the national territory,<br />

• Boosting economic development,<br />

• Create or maintain jobs in industry,<br />

• And attracting investment and expertise at European level and globally.<br />

In view of this, in order to be recognized as a cluster, a draft project of pole must meet the<br />

specified criteria defined in November 2004 by the government. The following four criteria<br />

are decisive:<br />

• A development strategy consistent with the economic development of the<br />

territory of the pole,<br />

• A development strategy consistent with the local dynamism and performance of<br />

the economic fabric in the light of international competition,<br />

• Sufficient international recognition, both industrially &/or technologically.<br />

The projects submitted must eventually pave the way to a leading position worldwide in<br />

their specific fields. The second criterion refers to a distinction between the poles with the<br />

20<br />

Leroy, F. (2005), “Pôles de compétitivité : de l’appel à projets à la labellisation”. Entreprises, réseaux<br />

et territoires, 22 March 2005.


18<br />

Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 9-24)<br />

main focus on technological research activities and the strength of interactions between<br />

research centers and companies working on the development in a field of technology by<br />

comparison to the dominant industrial poles which cluster companies with more concretely<br />

applied R & D and consequently is closer to the immediate market.<br />

• A partnership between actors and a structured, operational management.<br />

• In actual fact, the quality and efficiency of R & D partnerships between agents<br />

(industrials, researchers, lecturers...) are the main criteria for official recognition of<br />

a cluster.<br />

• The ability to create synergies in research and development and bring new wealth<br />

with high added values.<br />

The ultimate goal is to improve the competitiveness of the French offer on international<br />

markets.<br />

In Europe, the lack of competitiveness persists and is worsening specifically in view of a<br />

stronger euro. The new policy allows to draw benefits from this situation with companies<br />

benefitting from the disinflationary effect of the strong euro on the cost of raw materials in<br />

particular. Europe places high value on quality, this being the only way it can face<br />

competition dominated by cost. The purpose of the clusters is to accentuate Europeʹs<br />

competitiveness with the desire to achieve the goals set in 2000 by the Lisbon summit 21 .<br />

The initiative of clusters in the Mediterranean countries via the Euro-<br />

Mediterranean partnership with the example of Morocco<br />

Mediterranean countries having specialized in low cost production for a long time, are<br />

feeling the brunt from competition, especially in traditional sectors (e.g. textiles), from India,<br />

from Asia or eastern countries. They are also faced with the dumping of international<br />

monetary exchange.<br />

The cluster policy is at its initial stages. It is in their interest to integrate this new<br />

perspective to update and show off the advantages of their know-how through globalization.<br />

The challenge is to assert themselves in gathering their expertise to give a quantitative and<br />

qualitative added value to production, a competitive advantage in order to revitalize the<br />

Mediterranean economy on the international market. Hence the establishment of support<br />

plans with the financial aid of the European Union.<br />

Since the autumn of 1995, the Barcelona process, provides a framework for relations<br />

between the EU and the countries of the southern shores of the Mediterranean and with the<br />

objective to work towards building a Euro-Mediterranean shared prosperity and progressive<br />

introduction of free trade. It is a turning point in the relations between EU and its<br />

21<br />

This strategy of clusters puts forward the regional appeal. It was highlighted at the Lisbon summit<br />

in 2000, at which the heads of States set the objective to make Europe the leading world region for its<br />

competitiveness by 2010, « The most dynamic economic knowledge and the most competitive in the<br />

world able to sustain a lasting economic growth » by investing 3% of the gross domestic product GDP.<br />

Seven years on, it has severely fallen behind as none of the countries have stuck to the set objectives<br />

except Finland (in particular with the development of Nokia, the renowned telecommunication<br />

cluster) and Sweden. The only two countries having honored their engagement to dedicate 3% of their<br />

GDP to R&D activities.


Matray, M., The Upsurgence of Clusters, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No, 1-2, 9-24) 19<br />

Mediterranean neighbors. Through this process, the European Commission supports specific<br />

projects to sustain development through an expansionary fiscal policy. Thus, the launch of a<br />

European Neighborhood Policy to support the Euro-Mediterranean Partnership, has been<br />

initiated for numerous projects amongst which the MEDA projects (acronym for measure<br />

adjustment). Similarities of local policies with Europe appear as the emergence of the policy<br />

initiative of clusters combining endogenous growth, territorial economic intelligence leading<br />

to world renown. The trend of “glocalization” is gradually becoming a widespread policy of<br />

regional development for global competitiveness. The Barcelona II conference, held in<br />

November 2005, led in particular to a stronger political partnership. Thus Morocco manages<br />

to do the bulk of its trade with the European Union, which, on 13 October 2008, awarded it<br />

the “advanced status”, setting it halfway between partnership and membership. Morocco is<br />

the first of the Mediterranean partner countries to have been awarded this status which<br />

strengthens the partnership: the opportunities for cooperation with the European Union are<br />

providing a broader and more liberal trade, an enhanced political dialogue, exchanges<br />

relating to foreign and internal security policy issues and allowing access to certain<br />

programs and community agencies with budgetary support as of 2013.<br />

Initiation by Mediterranean countries to engage partnerships<br />

Since 2004, the Mediterranean partners and Libya - except Turkey who began<br />

negotiations with the European Union on 3 October 2005 - are also included in a new set up:<br />

the European Neighborhood Policy started in March 2003 for the countries not belonging to<br />

the Union. The following tables highlight the positioning of the Mediterranean countries<br />

compared to the EU.<br />

Table 1. Economic indicators of the Mediterranean countries and the EU<br />

Economic indicators Algeria Morocco Tunisia European Union<br />

Population (2007) 33 333 216 33 757 175 10 227 157 490 426 060<br />

Rate of growth (2006) 3 % 7.3 % 5.2 %<br />

Rate of growth of the 27 (2007)<br />

countries<br />

2.9 %<br />

Unemployment rate (2006) 9.7 % 1 13.9 % 8.5 %<br />

Source: http://www.statistiques-mondiales.com/index.html<br />

1<br />

http://www.imf.org/external/np/ms/2007/fra/061107af-1.gif<br />

Table 2. Progression of growth rate of the Mediterranean countries<br />

Growth rate progression 2002 2 2005 3 2006 2007 2008 3<br />

Algeria 4.1 % 5.3 % 3 % 6.5 % 5.4 %<br />

Morocco 3.2 % 1.8 % 7.3 % 3.2 % 4.9 %<br />

Tunisia 1.7 % 4.2 % 5.2 % 5.8 %<br />

North African countries 5.2 %<br />

Source: http://www.statistiques-mondiales.com/index.html<br />

2<br />

Statistics of the World Bank. // http://www.worldbank.org/data/countrydata/ countrydata.html<br />

3<br />

According to the FMI report, “Les perspectives de l’économie mondiale”.


20<br />

Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 9-24)<br />

Table 3. Mediterranean countries and their trade volume<br />

2002 Algeria Morocco Tunisia<br />

Balance of payment (% of GDP) 7.7 % 2.9 % -3.5 %<br />

Trade volume with the EU (Mio €) 22 377 13 992 13 629<br />

EU balance of trade (Mio €) -6 201 1 402 1 539<br />

Direct foreign investment (Mio USD) 1 100 428 794.8<br />

Source: Statistics of the World Bank<br />

http://www.worldbank.org/data/countrydata/ countrydata.html<br />

The levels of development of the partner countries are very unequal, particularly in terms<br />

of population and GDP. With the extension of the EU on 1 May 2004, the EU has integrated<br />

two out of the twelve Mediterranean partners 22 namely Cyprus and Malta. The<br />

Mediterranean countries with the highest population have been statistically identified<br />

(Algeria, Morocco, Tunisia) in order to establish a comparison with the European Union. In<br />

2002 these countries had already recorded trade with the EU with growth rates of 4.1% for<br />

Algeria, 3.2% for Morocco and 1.7% for Tunisia respectively. Now set in a growing phase,<br />

the Mediterranean countries continue to increase their growth rates with 3% for Algeria,<br />

7.3% for Morocco and 5.2% for Tunisia in 2006; the drops being mainly due to drought and<br />

rising oil prices. Thus the North African countries have an estimated growth rate of 5.2% for<br />

2008 while the 27 European Union countries stagnated with a growth rate of 2.9%. The Euro-<br />

Mediterranean partnership is of equal importance to each. It allows the EU to expand its<br />

markets and formally establish constructive partnerships, as in the field of textile following<br />

the dismantling of Multi-Fiber Agreement MFA in 2005. As for the Mediterranean countries<br />

the Barcelona process allows to uphold past relations with the EU, to position themselves as<br />

partners with the EU in the face of competition from new entrants from Eastern countries<br />

into the EU, which increasingly monopolize the EU budget, and can to acquire new markets<br />

by teaming up with the EU as united front facing up to competition from emerging<br />

countries. This partnership now englobes thirty-seven countries of which twenty-seven<br />

being EU member countries and ten being Mediterranean partner countries.<br />

The cluster policy: the emergence of a new strategy in Mediterranean countries<br />

through the MEDA program…<br />

In order to further optimize the Euro-Mediterranean partnership, the agreement provides<br />

tools for financial cooperation to support the economic move within the Mediterranean<br />

partner countries. It revolves around various support plans such as the MEDA projects,<br />

projects from the FEMIP (Facility for Euro-Mediterranean Investment and Partnership)... The<br />

interest in this research focuses on the MEDA projects in Morocco. The MEDA program,<br />

agreed by the European Council of Cannes in June 1995, is one of financial instruments for<br />

the implementation of the Euro-Mediterranean Partnership. Through this program, the<br />

22<br />

The twelve Mediterranean partners are Algeria, Cyprus, Egypt, Israel, Jordan, Lebanon, Malta,<br />

Morocco, Syria, Tunisia, and Turkey.


Matray, M., The Upsurgence of Clusters, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No, 1-2, 9-24) 21<br />

European Union provides financial and technical assistance to Mediterranean partners to<br />

enable them to achieve the objectives set out in the Barcelona Declaration bearing three<br />

components: political, economic and social. The main focus being on the economic element<br />

which has as its objective to progressively establish a free trade. The economic component<br />

has facilitated financial cooperation through various support projects such as the MEDA<br />

program and loans from the European Investment Bank. Thus, a global budget is granted by<br />

project not by country. It is the European Commission which, in collaboration with each<br />

individual Mediterranean partner, is developing programs to aid the economic transition,<br />

funded under MEDA. These programs can take different forms including “private sector<br />

development support, economic transition support, sustainable socio-economic development<br />

support and structural adjustment programs support” 23 . The beneficiaries of funding by the<br />

MEDA program are the States, the regions, the local authorities, government agencies and<br />

non-governmental organizations within EU countries and Mediterranean partner countries.<br />

The role of MEDA program in Morocco<br />

The MEDA program aims to adapt to the new dynamics of competitiveness through<br />

sustainable development, job creation and wealth. It allowed the establishment of Support<br />

Project Units (UAP), MEDA project management entities. In Morocco, they focus in<br />

particular on human resources development 24 (education, training), of which three<br />

specifically selected fields of activity drive its economy: tourism, textiles, the New<br />

Information Technologies and Communication (NTIC). These projects emphasize (vocational<br />

training, skills-based approach) and develop these fields in order to meet the needs of social<br />

and economic development in view of international expansion. What is the relation with the<br />

cluster policy? The importance of the role of training. This method involves the process of<br />

economic intelligence in companies in a given geographical territory. The capital of human<br />

training &/or else the presence of appropriate infrastructures are the first phase of emergence<br />

to initiate a cluster policy.<br />

The governance aspect may also intervene in such instances as uneven geographical<br />

location of Information and Communication Technologies (ICTs) in a territory and a country<br />

(importance of the role of clusters regarding the distribution of innovation and transmission<br />

of knowledge). In this context Y. Bertacchini stresses the utter importance of ICT territorial<br />

integration with an initiative of information and communication “at risk of being<br />

marginalized nationally and internationally” 25 . As a result governance can cover all or part<br />

of the draft economic development, hence the importance of integrating the functioning of a<br />

cluster in Mediterranean countries.<br />

Expected results for 2010<br />

Results forecast for 2010 would be:<br />

23<br />

“Union européenne et Méditerranée”, la Documentation française. //<br />

http://www.ladocumentationfrancaise.fr/dossiers/europe-mediterranee/index.shtml<br />

24<br />

Some projects have also focused on the development of infrastructures, trunk roads, and other fields<br />

of activity.<br />

25<br />

Bertacchini, Y. and Oueslati, L. (2003), “Entre information et processus de communication:<br />

l’intelligence territoriale”. // http://www.isdm.org


22<br />

Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 9-24)<br />

• “In tourism, training of 72 000 young people, including 18 000 through<br />

apprenticeships and upgrading of human resources;<br />

• In textile, training of 75 000 young people, including 30 000 through<br />

apprenticeships, the achievement of a basic literacy skills program for the benefit<br />

of 50 000 workers and upgrading of human resources;<br />

• In ICT, training of 63 000 young people and upgrading of human resources” 26<br />

The interest to define these objectives is to emphasize the achievement of training in these<br />

three driving fields.<br />

These support plans, including the MEDA program, constitute the beginnings of an<br />

industrial policy of clusters for the Mediterranean countries. According to Michalet CA.,<br />

Globalization is not yet a global phenomenon. Only some countries are concerned: in<br />

addition to the countries of the Triad - EU, North America and Japan - there are fifteen<br />

emerging economies: China, India, the newly industrialized countries (the Dragons) and the<br />

Asian Tigers in Asia, Mexico, Chile and Brazil in Latin America, Poland, Hungary, Slovenia<br />

and the Czech Republic in central Europe. Thus, countries on the sidelines of globalization<br />

seek to attract foreign investment (one of the four objectives of the cluster policy) because<br />

they fear marginalization. In this way the Mediterranean countries wishing to become more<br />

industrialized, to increase their export in order to better position themselves vis-à-vis<br />

competition and therefore to be able to be integrated in the flow of globalization.<br />

Conclusion<br />

The cluster is defined as “a system of enterprises rooted in a region where interactivity<br />

helps to secure long-term global competitiveness of national production” 27 ; this quotation<br />

reflects the fact that the pole is a territorial representation of globalization. So, it was<br />

demonstrated in the first part that the cluster, in order to develop, incorporates in its<br />

functioning that which globalization brings with it. Furthermore, this policy was created to<br />

be consistent with market expectations, which are ever more demanding, and its everincreasing<br />

race for innovation. Consequently this policy is reflected in relation to these new<br />

conditions, which are becoming relentlessly more difficult to fulfil (importance of<br />

innovation, importance of investment in research and training, particularly in higher<br />

education, complexity of innovative processes...). This policy proposes development<br />

prospects. With this logic, competitiveness clusters gradually become a model of industrial<br />

performance. In effect, changing technology and accelerating markets have brought about<br />

the change. What is now required is to combine expertise in the diverse fields of technology<br />

with a speedy and well-timed reactivity on the market of innovations. These two major<br />

issues make the process of “collaborative innovation” unavoidable. Accordingly the clusters<br />

have permitted to put in place those conditions imposed by globalization and, paradoxically,<br />

in order to remain or to be integrated in the globalization process, to allow the country in<br />

which they are implanted optimum competitiveness. The cluster is primarily a policy of<br />

growth hence the interest to continue to support this policy in European countries and to<br />

introduce it in Mediterranean countries so that everyone can take a stand in the light of<br />

26<br />

Meda Website of Morocco. // http://www.meda2-fp.ma/<br />

27<br />

Samson, I. (2008) under the direction of., L’économie contemporaine en leçons, Dalloz.


Matray, M., The Upsurgence of Clusters, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No, 1-2, 9-24) 23<br />

competition and confirms their position in global markets. The dominant overall<br />

configuration of the financial profitability is fragile, the industrial policy of clusters might<br />

therefore become the basis for a “new governance”, to correct, to channel the excesses of<br />

globalization. As the term “governance” highlights, it is also important to clarify the role of<br />

institutions for the implementation of poles. The author Colletis mentions the need for<br />

institutional agents for the creation and sustainability of the pole, whether it be in<br />

infrastructure, equipment, funding research programs, partnerships with the region,<br />

department, local organization or chambers of trade and industry. European funds for the<br />

establishment of clusters in France or government aid through projects such as MEDA<br />

programs in Mediterranean countries show how imperative involvement of institutional<br />

bodies is for the credibility of a project, for its launch and for its sustainability over time.<br />

References<br />

Angelier, J-P. (2007), Economie des industries de réseau, Presses Universitaires de Grenoble PUG<br />

Becattini, G. (1992), “Le District Marshallien : une notion socio-économique”, In Benko, G. and Lipietz,<br />

A. (1992), Les régions qui gagnent, Paris, PUF.<br />

Bertacchini, Y. and Oueslati, L. (2003), “Entre information et processus de communication:<br />

l’intelligence territoriale”. //http://www.isdm.org<br />

Bories-Azeau, I. and Loubès, A. (2007), “Emergence d’un acteur collectif territorial et réseau<br />

d’entreprises : l’exemple de CAMDIB”, October 2007, Revue RECEMAP.<br />

Bouchet, Y. and Bertacchini, Y. and Noël, L. (2008), “Construire la confiance dans les échanges<br />

numériques, cas dans un pôle de compétitivité”, 3rd quarter 2008, ISDM Informations, Savoirs,<br />

Décisions & Médiations.<br />

Bougnoux, D. (2001), Introduction aux sciences de la communication, Editions La Découverte & Syros,<br />

Paris.<br />

Carayon, B. (2003), Intelligence économique, compétitivité et cohésion sociale, La Documentation<br />

Française.<br />

Carel, S. (2005), “La politique française de développement de réseaux d’entreprises localisés,<br />

Technopôles, SPL, pôles de compétitivité : quels enjeux pour les territoires ?”, La politique<br />

française de développement de réseaux d’entreprises localisés, Septièmes Rencontres de Théo<br />

Quant, January 2005. //http://thema.univ-fcomte.fr/theoq/pdf/2005/Carel-theoquant05.pdf<br />

Colletis, G. (2005), “Entreprises et territoires : proximités et développement local”, published in:<br />

Entreprises, réseaux et territoires, 22 March 2005.<br />

Dupuy, C. and Burmeister, A. and al. (2003), Entreprises et territoires, les nouveaux enjeux de la<br />

proximité, Paris, La documentation Française.<br />

Future study of DATAR under the direction of Darmon, D. (2004), La France, puissance industrielle,<br />

une nouvelle politique industrielle par les territoires, La documentation française, Paris.<br />

Ferguene, A. and Hsaini, A. (1998), “Développement endogène et articulation entre globalisation et<br />

territorialisation : éléments d’analyse à partir du cas de Ksar-Hellal”, Revue Région et<br />

Développement n°7-1998.<br />

Fischer, G.N. (1980), Espace industriel et liberté, Paris, PUF, Coll, p. 45-46. In Mérenne-Schoumaker, B.<br />

(2002), La localisation des industries, enjeux et dynamiques, les PUR (Presses Universitaires de<br />

Rennes), p. 54.<br />

Jacquet, N. and Darmon, D. (2005), Les pôles de compétitivité. Le modèle français, Documentation<br />

française, coll. Etudes n°5225.


24<br />

Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 9-24)<br />

Knauf, A. (2006), “Le rôle des acteurs dans un dispositif régional d’intelligence économique : La place<br />

de l’informédiaire en tant que médiateur et animateur du dispositif”. //<br />

http://hal.inria.fr/docs/00/10/73/12/PDF/knauf_numeroIE2006_corrige.pdf<br />

Loinger, G. and Némery, J-C. (1998), Recomposition et développement des territoires, enjeux<br />

économiques, processus, acteurs, L’Harmattan.<br />

Michalet, C-A. (2003), “Comptes rendus d’auditions, Mondialisation : une chance pour<br />

l’environnement ?”, 12 March 2003. // http://www.senat.fr/rap/r03-233/r03-23355.html<br />

Michalet, C-A. (2007), Mondialisation, la grande rupture, La Découverte.<br />

Mohellebi, D. and Dou, H. (2007), “Les nouvelles technologies de l’information et de la<br />

communication & la capitalisation des compétences internes de l’entreprise”, ISDM 31, //<br />

http://isdm.univ-tln.fr<br />

Némery, J-C. (2006), Les pôles de compétitivité dans le système français et européen, approches sur les<br />

partenariats institutionnels, L’Harmattan.<br />

Perrat, J. and Zimmermann, J.-B. (2003), “Stratégies des firmes et dynamiques territoriales”, in Dupuy,<br />

C. and Burmeister, A. and al. (2003), Entreprises et territoires, les nouveaux enjeux de la proximité,<br />

Paris, La documentation Française.<br />

Porter, M. (1990), The Competitive Advantage of Nations, London & Basingstoke: Macmillan.<br />

Savatier, J. (2007), “L’innovation et l’anticipation des mutations économiques et sociales : perspectives<br />

européenne”, in “Innovation et anticipation des mutations économiques et sociales”, Seminar<br />

organized by the European Commission, Diact and DGEFP, Bordeaux, 22-24 October 2007.<br />

Samson, I. (2008), L’économie contemporaine en 10 leçons, Dalloz.<br />

Schmidt, D. (2004), “Le partenariat euro-méditerranéen : une entreprise inachevée”, In Questions<br />

internationales n°10, Le Maghreb, La Documentation française; November-December 2004.<br />

Thoenig, J-C. and Waldman, C. (2005), De l’entreprise marchande à l’entreprise marquante, Editions<br />

d’Organisation.<br />

Zara, O. (2005), Le management de l’intelligence collective : vers une nouvelle gouvernance, M2<br />

éditions.<br />

Article history:<br />

Received: 30 March 2009<br />

Accepted: 19 October 2009


ORIGINAL SCIENTIFIC PAPER<br />

The Analysis of Long Run Growth Oriented Fiscal Policy<br />

Erős Adrienn * , University of Miskolc, Institute of Economic Theory, Miskolc, Hungary<br />

UDC: 336.02(439);(415) JEL: H3; N14<br />

ABSTRACT - One of the most debated questions of growth theory is whether or not government<br />

policies can be used to influence the long run growth rate of the economy. Neoclassical theory states<br />

economic policy actions can only have short run effects on the growth rate of the economy, but it can’t<br />

change the long run perspectives for growth.<br />

Endogenous growth theory integrated (among several other factors) fiscal policy to the growth<br />

models, enabling it to influence long run growth performance. According to these theories some<br />

elements of the government budget have positive effects on the long run growth rate of the economy<br />

(productive expenditures, and budget balance), while others are neutral (non-distortionary taxation<br />

and unproductive expenditures), or have negative consequences for growth (distortionary taxation).<br />

In my paper I summarize the theoretical and empirical literature of the relationship between fiscal<br />

policy and long run economic growth shortly. Then I continue my work with using the parameter<br />

estimates of a third generation study of developed countries (which considers the budget constraint as<br />

well) to evaluate the fiscal policy actions taken in Hungary and in Ireland, concentrating on the<br />

overall long run trends in the last one and a half decade. I will try to give explanation for the<br />

differences in the two countries’ reactions to some of the similar fiscal policy changes mapped during<br />

my research.<br />

KEY WORDS: fiscal policy, economic growth, Hungary, Ireland<br />

Review of the research topic<br />

The most important aim of economic policy is to ensure the highest level and most<br />

general welfare possible to the citizens of a country. There can be no other way to improve<br />

welfare over the long run but stimulating intense and sustainable economic growth. That is<br />

why the analysis of economic growth is a central question in the theory of economic policy,<br />

macro- and international economics.<br />

„Even small differences in long-term growth rates when cumulated over a generation or<br />

more, have much greater consequences for standards of living than the kinds of short-term<br />

business fluctuations that have typically occupied most of the attention of macroeconomists.<br />

To put it another way, if we can learn about government policy options that have even small<br />

effects on the long-term growth rate, then we can contribute much more to improvements in<br />

standards of living than has been provided by the entire history of macroeconomic analysis<br />

of countercyclical policy and fine-tuning. Economic growth is the part of macroeconomics<br />

that really matters.” [Barro – Sala-i-Martin (1995) 4-5 pp.]<br />

*<br />

Tel: +36 / 46 / 565-111 / 18-71, mob: +36 / 20 / 34-27-486, fax: +36 / 46 / 565-194, e-mail: geteros@unimiskolc.hu


26<br />

Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 25-33)<br />

The above cited words perplexed me, when I first read them. I found their message a bit<br />

exaggerated, showing the self-consciousness of the researcher, his preference of his own<br />

interest. Still they made me think about the question. The more I thought about their<br />

veracity, the more I had to admit they are right. I think the matter of long run economic<br />

growth is of major importance. It is a stressful and timely problem from Hungary’s point of<br />

view, as after our accession to the European Union, convergence got into the focus of<br />

attention. Hungary’s per capita GDP, based on purchasing power parities did not reach even<br />

half of that of 25 member European Union’s average a decade ago (in 1997 it was only 49,5%<br />

of that, Eurostat), and even in this year, in 2007 it reaches only 64,5% of the EU average.<br />

We are facing a long period of convergence, based on these data. It is a highly logical<br />

question to ask what we can do to improve the pace of economic growth. This question<br />

belongs to the field of economic policy (among others) as well. I chose to study the fiscal<br />

instruments’ possible effects on long run economic growth in my research. I had three<br />

reasons to make this choice. On the one hand, the literature of economic growth theory<br />

focuses on fiscal policy’s growth effects, while on the other hand monetary policy (as we<br />

hope) will be lost as a national policy instrument after accessing the Euro-zone. This means<br />

the only policy left at our disposal to influence economic activities (among them economic<br />

growth) will be fiscal policy. My third reason was that before this research I was concerned<br />

with taxation matters and international tax harmonization so fiscal policy was familiar to me.<br />

I chose Ireland as a reference country, because she proved in the last two decades with her<br />

outstanding economic performance that convergence is not just a dream, and that economic<br />

policy (if properly done) can contribute to the pace of economic growth.<br />

Research background and methodology<br />

During the empirical work (arising from the macroeconomic characteristics of the theme)<br />

I made my calculations based on data taken from different international statistical databases.<br />

The main (but not the only) source of the data I used was the SourceOECD on-line statistical<br />

database. In order to ensure comparability, I endeavoured to minimize the types of databases<br />

used. Because of the methodological differences sustained by Hungary till 1997 distinct data<br />

are not published for Hungary in international databases. So in the case of those variables I<br />

had to rely on the data of the KSH (Central Statistics Office of Hungary), and PM ÁPMSO -<br />

ÁHIR (Hungarian Finance Ministry’s database).<br />

In my empirical work I analysed the relevant fiscal variables by using SPSS 14.0 and<br />

EViews 4.1. software.<br />

Empirical analysis<br />

The question dealt with in the paper is whether there is correlation, and if yes, how<br />

strong it is, between the long run growth rate of the economy and fiscal policy. Arguments<br />

can often be heard that economic policy is almighty, and the state can do anything. Other<br />

experts tend to stress that the state should not involve in economic affairs and its influence<br />

on economy ought to be minimized. Others add that the major aim should be (if economy<br />

evolved in such a way that state’s involvement in the economy, and mixed economy can be


Erös, A., The Analysis of Long Run Growth, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No, 1-2, 25-33) 27<br />

considered as natural) the maintenance of budget balance and the confine of state’s debt as a<br />

share of GDP.<br />

According to neoclassical growth theory, long run economic growth can be contributed<br />

to two exogenous factors, technological progress and the growth rate of economically active<br />

population. This attitude leaves only limited, short run, temporary effect for fiscal policy on<br />

the growth rate of the economy even though it is capable of changing the achieved level of<br />

welfare permanently. Endogenous growth theory on the other hand states that fiscal policy<br />

can influence the long run growth rate of the economy as well. The most recent, third<br />

generation empirical studies based on the endogenous theory of growth use several groups<br />

of variables which can either contribute to the growth rate (like productive expenditure,<br />

budget balance), or be neutral to growth (like non-distortionary taxation and unproductive<br />

expenditure), or harm growth (like distortionary taxation). Those revenue sources and<br />

expenditure types, which have ambiguous growth effect, are called other revenues and other<br />

expenditure.<br />

According to our hypothesis there is correlation among these fiscal variables and the long<br />

run growth rate of the economy, and these correlations meet the expectations concluded by<br />

surveying the relevant theoretical and empirical literature both in their strength and in their<br />

directions.<br />

Based on the correlation and regression calculations made it can be concluded that the<br />

calculated results meet our expectations based on the survey of the theoretical and empirical<br />

literature in the case of most fiscal variables, even though there are some exceptions. Both the<br />

indicators used to measure the extent of the state as a share of GDP (the ratio of income<br />

centralisation and the ratio of redistribution) are negatively correlated with long run growth<br />

rate of the economy in both countries. This relationship is known as scale-effect in the<br />

literature of endogenous growth theory, and its existence can be confirmed in case of the<br />

analysed countries.<br />

The ratio to GDP of distortionary taxation is negatively related with the growth rate of<br />

the economy in both countries, which tendency meets our expectations formed when<br />

surveying the theoretical and empirical literature of growth.<br />

The share of non-distortionary taxation to GDP is not significantly correlated with<br />

growth based on Irish data, which trend coincides with our theoretical cognition. At the<br />

same time, Hungarian data show a reverse relationship, showing significant positive<br />

correlation between the two variables. The most probable reason for this is the increase in the<br />

share of non-distortionary taxation within the generally shrinking tax wedge, while decrease<br />

in the share of distortionary taxation is positively related with growth. The increase of the<br />

ratio of non-distortionary taxation to revenue enhances growth based on both countries’<br />

data, which result meets our expectations.<br />

Productive expenditure as a share of GDP is not significantly related with the growth rate<br />

of the economy based on Irish data (this results meets our expectations), while according to<br />

Hungarian data the two variables correlate negatively. This contradicts the finding of<br />

theoretical and empirical literature, and the reason for it must lay in the parallel changes<br />

occurred in the structure and extension of the budget as a share of GDP. The ratio of public<br />

expenditure to GDP decreased by 8 percentage points during the period in question, while<br />

productive expenditure as a share of GDP fall back only by 2 percentage points, so their


28<br />

Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 25-33)<br />

share of all expenses rose by 2 percentage points. The decrease of productive expenditure’s<br />

ratio to GDP must rather have been parallel in time to the rise of the growth rate than being<br />

the reason for it.<br />

The share of unproductive expenditure in GDP is not significantly correlated with the<br />

long run growth rate of the economy in Ireland, in accordance with the predictions of the<br />

third generation studies. In Hungary significant negative relation can be found between the<br />

two variables. This suits the findings of certain second generation studies, showing negative<br />

relation between the extension of transfer programmes and the long run growth rate of the<br />

economy.<br />

The ratio of budget balance to GDP relates positively with the long run growth rate of the<br />

economy according to all types of empirical studies. This statement can be confirmed both in<br />

the case of Hungary and Ireland, showing significant positive correlation between the two<br />

variables. Two measures were used to characterise the relationship between long run<br />

economic growth and state debt. Three and five year averages of state debt’s share in GDP<br />

relate significantly negatively with growth in both countries. Three and five year average<br />

change in state debt is in significant negative correlation with the long run growth rate of the<br />

economy. These results meet our expectations formed when surveying the theoretical and<br />

empirical literature.<br />

Our conjuncture is that Ireland forewent the previous leaded states. What can the<br />

enviable success of Ireland be attributed to? Several possible reasons, like aptitudes<br />

(geographical position, English mother tongue, a young population unmatched in developed<br />

countries) economic history (doubling of the EU funds, Single European Market), and<br />

economic development (globalisation, foreign direct investment, change in the importance of<br />

distance, revolution of the IT systems) are mentioned in literature. Many of the experts stress<br />

the importance of economic policy actions (tax system and industrial policy aiming to attract<br />

FDI, activities of enterprise agencies, reform of the system of education, partnership<br />

agreements securing a low wage level for a long period of time). We think additionally to<br />

what has been mentioned the role of certain political and cultural factors, economic and<br />

social sacrifices made for success are worth attention as well. Fast convergence is due to<br />

several factors.<br />

According to our analysis a possible explanation of the “Irish economic miracle” can be<br />

conditional convergence. The two known forms of transition paths (delayed convergence,<br />

which occurs due to the elimination of barriers to growth and imitation based on adaptation<br />

of more developed, more productive technology) strengthened each-other, and three<br />

beneficial external factors’ synergic effect (doubling of the EU Funds, European Single<br />

Market and a long boom of the US economy) made the convergence so fast and dynamic.<br />

We can conclude convergence has happened in Ireland. Further strengthening of her<br />

economic position (foregoing the present leader states) requires her to take part in<br />

developing new technologies. The country is committed to this and R&D expenses have been<br />

increased seriously even in real terms. Irish enterprise agencies have noticed that their<br />

strategy needs to be reformed, as competition for international capital escalated and Ireland’s<br />

traditional competitive advantages, low wages and low taxes are not unique in the EU<br />

anymore, and after the new member states in Eastern Europe accessed the Union. New<br />

strategic directions were appointed in 2004; the aim is to form new clusters in high value


Erös, A., The Analysis of Long Run Growth, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No, 1-2, 25-33) 29<br />

added sectors and internationally tradable services. Most of the selected industries have<br />

antecedents in the country and the necessary regulations are being formed now. Based on<br />

these facts we can conclude that Ireland does not rest in her laurels but takes any steps she<br />

can in order to maintain her dynamic growth.<br />

According to economic data Ireland’s convergence is so successful that she has already<br />

foregone almost all her competitors with respect to per capita real GDP based on purchasing<br />

power parity (she has foregone most of her EU-member concurrent during 1997-1998, since<br />

2001 only the performance of Norway, Luxembourg and the USA is higher than Ireland’s).<br />

Convergence has been finished in Ireland, moreover, she has even foregone the previous<br />

leaders (those member states of the European Union whose economic performance was<br />

better than hers), and we have witnessed the rare phenomena of leapfrogging in Ireland’s<br />

case.<br />

As we have seen, the direction of the correlation between fiscal variables and the growth<br />

rate are the same in each variable’s case in both countries. At the same time, according to our<br />

hypothesis the decrease of government sector as a share of GDP (and any other budgetary<br />

variables) can not be unrestricted; the pace of growth can not be dynamized by this<br />

endlessly. This conjecture of us is strengthened by the fact that underlying processes in the<br />

two analysed countries differ. During the analyses of the correlation between most of the<br />

fiscal variables and the long run growth rate of the economy we discovered an important<br />

statutory. We found a negative relation between the certain fiscal factors and the long run<br />

growth rate of the economy in both countries’ case during correlation calculations, but when<br />

estimating regression equations we experienced that negative correlation is unambiguous<br />

based on Hungarian data, but to Irish data parabolic regression functions can be fitted in<br />

most cases (there are some exemptions like social security contributions, health and<br />

productive expenditure). In the case of all the other variables we can conclude that the right<br />

hand leg of the Irish parabolic function can be regarded as the continuation of the negative<br />

regression fitted to Hungarian data.<br />

This finding can be originated in two reasons. On the one hand, Hungarian government’s<br />

extension as a share of GDP is higher, than the Irish one. For example, the ratio of<br />

government expenses to GDP shrunken from 45,3% to 31,5% in Ireland during the period in<br />

question, while in Hungary it fall back from 63,44% to 47,4%, so it is still much higher, than<br />

the original level of Ireland used to be in 1990. Similar tendencies show in the other possible<br />

measure of government’s extension, government revenues’ share in GDP.<br />

On the other hand, another possible explanation for the divergence in the behaviour of<br />

the two countries can be the different situation the two countries are in on their transition<br />

paths. Ireland stepped on a transition path around 1987. During the twenty years passed,<br />

convergence finished and even more, we witness the rare case of leapfrogging. Hungary is in<br />

quite a different situation after the changing of the Regime [Erdős (2003) 294 p.], she is on a<br />

transition path as well, but her path is very different from that of Ireland’s and her lag from<br />

the leaders is still very large. The gap is closing from year to year, still, even in 2007 we only<br />

achieve 64,5% of the 25 member EU member states’ average per capita GDP based on<br />

purchasing power parity. Hungary still has a long convergence period to go through. That is<br />

why we do not have to expect the tendencies to turn for a long period of time, which means


30<br />

Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 25-33)<br />

that the advices given by growth theory are worth considering in Hungary’s case, based on<br />

Irelands recent past.<br />

In our opinion Irish fiscal policy contributes to the slow pace of the necessary fallback in<br />

the growth rate at the end of the transition path. The existence of conditional convergence is<br />

strengthened by the fact that the pace of economic growth has been slowing in Ireland in the<br />

recent past. At the same time, we must consider that the present, relatively slower growth is<br />

still enviable to most developed countries. It can only be called slow after the outstandingly<br />

high growth rate experienced from 1987 to 2001. Convergence (as we have already discussed<br />

above) has been enhanced by several fiscal and non-fiscal measures in Ireland. Based on the<br />

above analysis we can unequivocally conclude that the radical reform of fiscal policy<br />

contributed to the evolution of “Irish economic miracle”, or the “Celtic Tiger” phenomena.<br />

Figure 1. Long run growth rate of the economy as a function of the share of government<br />

revenue to GDP in Hungary and in Ireland<br />

Government revenue as a share of GDP<br />

(Moving average)<br />

Source: own representation<br />

Source of data used: SourceOECD<br />

Consistent shrinking of the government’s extension as a share of GDP, maintenance of<br />

the budget balance and the decrease of the ratio of state debt to GDP (which the fast growth<br />

of GDP used as benchmark also contributed to, of course) eventuated the result anticipated<br />

by growth theory, and even contributes to the evolution of the still very favourable (even<br />

though slowing) pace of economic growth. We endeavoured to strengthen this result by<br />

using the parameter estimates of a third generation empirical study as well. The analysis<br />

performed by the model confirmed recent year’s fiscal policy’s beneficial effects on the<br />

growth rate of the economy. Our findings show that after the millennium, as the growth rate


Erös, A., The Analysis of Long Run Growth, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No, 1-2, 25-33) 31<br />

started falling back in Ireland, fiscal policy contributed to the relatively slower decrease of<br />

the growth rate which is statutory at the end of the transition path.<br />

Hungary is under pressure in forming her fiscal policy today, the most important task is<br />

(beyond growth aspects we are required to meet the Maastricht criteria as well) to restore the<br />

balance of the budget. Fiscal consolidation in Hungary started only about a year ago, so it<br />

would be quite early to evaluate the long run effects of these policy actions now.<br />

Hungarian tax wedge can be considered as averagely high compared to other EU<br />

member states (Hungarian tax wedge is 39,2% of our GDP, while the average of the 25 EU<br />

member states is 40,7%). Even though compared to other recently accessed member states<br />

(their average is 35,2%) and to the Irish tax wedge (31,7%) it is quite high. [Eurostat, ISSN<br />

4020-4298] This means we have enough space to shrink the share of tax revenue to GDP,<br />

which would be beneficial to growth according to our analysis. According to these findings,<br />

from a growth oriented point of view we should rather decrease government expenses in<br />

order to restore budget balance, than increase government revenues.<br />

Opposite to the expansive trends of Irish fiscal policy in the 1970’s, the change in fiscal<br />

policy’s direction, a gradual shrinking of the budget’s extension as a share of GDP, which<br />

started at the end of the 1980’s contributed to the evolution of the „Celtic Tiger” phenomena.<br />

According to our hypothesis it is not enough to concentrate generally on the decrease of<br />

government activity’s level as a share of GDP. Structure of the budget plays at least as an<br />

important role in forming growth performance.<br />

To prove our assumption we used the parameter estimates of the already mentioned<br />

third generation endogenous Bleaney-Gemmel-Kneller model. The two countries we analyse<br />

represent too small a sample to calculate our own parameter-estimates based on them. But as<br />

both are developed countries (OECD member states) we found the study’s results (based on<br />

OECD member states’ sample) relevant for the countries in question. Authors of the study<br />

(out of the seven fiscal variables they included in their research) found significant effects of<br />

three fiscal variables on long run economic growth:<br />

• The ratio of distortionary taxation to GDP, which they attributed negative growth<br />

effects to based on the original model of Barro’s (1988);<br />

• The ratio of productive expenditure to GDP, which turns up with positive growth<br />

effects (again, in accordance with the model of Barro), and<br />

• The ratio of budget balance to GDP (which, again meeting our expectations formed<br />

when surveying theoretical and empirical literature) has a positive coefficient the<br />

regression equation.<br />

These three relevant factors influence the complex effect of fiscal policy actions on the<br />

pace of economic growth with different weights, calculated in the third generation empirical<br />

study. When evaluating the long run growth effects of Irish and Hungarian fiscal policies by<br />

using the parameter-estimates of the Bleaney-Gemmel-Kneller model we concluded that<br />

productive expenditure plays a major role in shaping the overall growth effect of fiscal<br />

policy. This was the most obtrusive in the case of Ireland, where the decrease in the ratio of<br />

productive expenditure to GDP meant the main growth impulse since 2000 (since the pace of<br />

economic growth started slowing).<br />

In Hungary, the dominant element in shaping the favourable long run growth effect of<br />

fiscal policy changes was the gradual decrease of the ratio of distortionary taxation to GDP.


32<br />

Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 25-33)<br />

At the same time we have to consider the increase in the ratio of productive expenditure to<br />

GDP in the second part of the time-period, after the years of the Bokros-package, which<br />

enhanced growth significantly. We calculated a neutral growth effect for the Bokros-Package<br />

by using parameter estimates of the third generation study. This can be attributed to the fact<br />

that the positive effect evolving from the improvement of budget balance and the decrease in<br />

the share of distortionary taxation to GDP was fully outweighed by the negative effect of the<br />

decrease in productive expenditure’s share in GDP. The dominant element again (we have to<br />

stress, just like in the case of Ireland) was the decrease in the ratio of productive expenditure<br />

to GDP.<br />

Altogether, we wished to demonstrate and strengthen with our analysis that adequately<br />

adopted fiscal policy actions are capable of enhancing the long run growth rate of the<br />

economy. Restoration of the budget balance and gradual (but not unlimited) shrinking of<br />

government’s extension as a share of GDP are needed in order to achieve the aimed effect At<br />

the same time we must not forget the importance of the structure of revenues and<br />

expenditure. Reduction of the government expenditure should be done by decreasing<br />

unproductive expenditure (as those are neutral to growth). Productive expenditure (which<br />

enhances growth as we have stated above) should be maintained.<br />

References<br />

Barro, R. J. (1988) Government Spending in a Simple Model of Endogenous Growth. National Bureau<br />

of Economic Research Working Paper No. 2588<br />

Barro, R. J. (1989a) A Cross-Country Study of Growth, Saving and Government. National Bureau of<br />

Economic Research Working Paper No. 2855<br />

Barro, R. J. - Sala-i-Martin, X. (1990) Public Finance in Models of Economic Growth. National Bureau<br />

of Economic Research Working Paper No. 3362.<br />

Barro, R. J. (1993) Economic Growth and Convergence. Occasional Papers number 46. ISBN 1-55815-<br />

283-0<br />

Barro, R. J. – Sala-i-Martin, X. (1995) Economic Growth. MacGraw-Hill, Inc. ISBN 0-07-003697-7<br />

Barro, R. J. (2005) A gazdasági növekedést meghatározó tényezők. Nemzeti Tankönyvkiadó, Budapest<br />

(Determinants of Economic Growth. A Cross-Country Empirical Study. 1997. MIT Press)<br />

Bleaney, M. – Gemmel, N. – Kneller, R. (2000) Testing the Endogenous Growth Model: Public<br />

Expenditure, Taxation and Growth over the Long-Run. University of Nottingham Discussion<br />

Papers in Economic No. 00/25. (ISSN 1360-2438)<br />

Easterly, W. – Rebelo, S. (1993) Fiscal Policy and Economic Growth: An Empirical Investigation.<br />

National Bureau of Economic Research Working Paper No. 4499.<br />

Engen, E. M. – Skinner, J. (1992) Fiscal Policy and Economic Growth. National Bureau of Economic<br />

Research Working Paper No. 4223.<br />

Engen , E. M. – Skinner, J. (1996) Taxation and Economic Growth. National Bureau of Economic<br />

Research Working Paper No. 5826.<br />

Erdős Tibor (2003) Fenntartható gazdasági növekedés. Akadémiai Kiadó, Budapest ISBN 963 05 8078 0<br />

Eurostat, Statistics in Focus: Tax Revenue in the EU. (2006/2) ISSN 4020-4298<br />

Fölster, S. – Henrekson, M. (2000) Growth Effects of Government Expenditure and Taxation in Rich<br />

Countries. European Economic Review (forthcoming)<br />

Gemmel, N. (2001) Fiscal Policy in a Growth Framework. World Institute for Development Economics<br />

Research Discussion Paper No. 2001/84


Erös, A., The Analysis of Long Run Growth, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No, 1-2, 25-33) 33<br />

Gemmel, N. – Kneller, R. (2003) Fiscal Policy, Growth and Convergence in Europe. New Zealand<br />

Treasury Working Paper 03/14 2003. jún.<br />

Gemmel, N. – Kneller, R. – Sanz, I. (2006) Fiscal Policy Impacts on Growth in the OECD: Are They<br />

Long- or Short-Run? (forthcoming)<br />

Howitt, P. (2006) Endogenous Growth. Article prepared for the new Palgrave Dictionary of<br />

Economics, 2nd Edition, ed. Steven Durlauf and Lawrence Blume<br />

Jánossy, F. (1966) A gazdasági fejlődés trendvonala és a helyreállítási periódusok. Közgazdasági és<br />

Jogi Kiadó, Budapest.<br />

King, R. G. – Rebelo, S. (1990) Public Policy and Economic Growth: Developing Neoclassical<br />

Implications. National Bureau of Economic Research Working Paper No. 3338.<br />

Kneller, R. (2000) The Implications of the Comprehensive Spending review for the Long-Run Growth<br />

Rate: A view from the Literature. National Institute Economic Review, 2000. 171. 94-105. pp<br />

Kneller, R. – Bleaney, M. – Gemmel, N. (1998) Growth, Public Policy and the Government Budget<br />

Constraint: Evidence from OECD Countries. University of Nottongham, School of Economics<br />

Discussion Paper No. 98/14.<br />

Mellár, T. (2001) Kedvezményezett vagy áldozat: a GDP és a költségvetési kiadások kapcsolata.<br />

Statisztikai Szemle, 79. évf. 2001. 7. szám 573-586. old.<br />

Mendoza, E. G. – Milesi-Ferretti, G. M. – Asea, P. (1997) On the Ineffectiveness of Tax Policy in<br />

Altering Long-Run Growth: Harberger’s Superneutrality Conjecture. <strong>Journal</strong> of Public Economics<br />

66. pp. 99-126<br />

Musgrave, R. A. – Musgrave, P. B. (1989) Public Finance in Theory and Practice (international edition)<br />

McGraw and Hill, ISBN 0-07-0441278<br />

Romer, P. M. (1989) Human Capital and Growth. National Bureau of Economic Research Working<br />

Paper No. 3173<br />

Roubini, N. – Milesi-Ferretti G. M. (1994) Taxation and Endogenous Growth in Open Economies. .<br />

National Bureau of Economic Research Working Paper No. 4881.<br />

Sala-i-Martin, X. (2002) 15 <strong>Year</strong>s of New Economics: What Have We Learnt? Columbia University,<br />

Department of Economics, Discussion Paper Series #0102-47<br />

Stiglitz, J. E. (2000) A kormányzati szektor gazdaságtana. KJK-Kerszöv. ISBN 963 224 560 1<br />

Tanzi, V. – Schuknecht, L. (2003) Public Finances and Economic Growth in European Countries.<br />

Prepared for the Conference on „Fostering Economic Growth in Europe”, Vienna June 12-13, 2003.<br />

Vigvári, A. (2005) Közpénzügyeink. KJK Kerszöv. ISBN 963 224 863 5<br />

Article history:<br />

Received: 7 January 2010<br />

Accepted: 16 March 2010


ORIGINAL SCIENFITIC PAPER<br />

Economic Assessment of Selected Bank Mergers in the Central-<br />

East Europe Region in Comparison with Developed Countries<br />

Tej Jakub * , Ekonomická fakulta TUKE, Košice, Slovakia<br />

UDC: 336.7(4) JEL: G15; E44; G34<br />

ABSTRACT – My intention is to clarify the process of merging from the economic point of view,<br />

especially impact on financial results after the merger itself. Examine and analyze differences in<br />

financial results, measured by using various ratio indicators, market value of shares and capital<br />

adequacy in the region of Central and Eastern Europe in comparison with developed markets in the<br />

world.<br />

KEY WORDS: economic situation, merger, the indicators of profitability, market value of shares,<br />

capital adequacy<br />

Introduction<br />

Nineties was characterized by a large number of mergers and acquisitions worldwide.<br />

This phenomenon belongs in the past decades to the preferred part of economic theory and<br />

practice. By the volume of capital bank mergers and acquisitions belong to highest rank of<br />

operations. They are closely linked with the globalization process and thanks to it very often<br />

cross national borders. Economic assumptions of mergers wave in last decade is the rapid<br />

development of information technology, reducing the cost of communication and transport,<br />

markets deregulation and privatization. In particular, acquisitions are an integral part of the<br />

restructuring process in transition economies.<br />

Merger itself has not always met planned expectations. There is no guarantee of<br />

achieving economies of scale, risk diversification and improvement of solvency. To fulfill all<br />

positive effects, it is necessary to prepare in advance more than just a basic plan and strategy.<br />

It is necessary to include regional specificities and all other relevant variables.<br />

Material and method<br />

The intention of article is to clarify the processes of mergers from an economic<br />

perspective and impact on financial results after the merger itself. Based on data from annual<br />

reports, it examines and analyzes the impact of mergers on banksʹ financial results, measured<br />

by various ratios or market value of shares and capital adequacy in the region of Central and<br />

Eastern Europe in comparison with developed markets in the world.<br />

*<br />

Address: Boženy Němcovej 32, Košice, Slovakia, e-mail: jakub.tej@tuke.sk


Tej, J., Economic Assessment of Selected Bank Mergers, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No, 1-2, 34-43) 35<br />

Achievement and discussion<br />

Merger usually means the process of merging two or more separate economic entities,<br />

which occurs through direct connection to their net assets. The merger, in most cases means<br />

the merger of relatively strong and equally important subjects, which is reflected in many<br />

aspects. The merger must be decided by the General Assembly of all participating<br />

companies. As arguments for mergers and acquisitions is tend to be given many reasons.<br />

Separations of reasons in favor of the merger and against them are widely various, and what<br />

some studies have considered clearly positive, others resolutely refuse. As an example, we<br />

can use the impact of mergers on employment and the expected impact of mergers on the<br />

effectiveness of the newly created bank. But the problem remains that many mergers are<br />

justified economically inefficient. Analysis shows that the main problem is merging different<br />

corporate culture of companies. Only few projects, of mergers and acquisitions have more<br />

than a basic plan how to solve this problem. Others fail because of incorrect valuation of<br />

assets or hidden liabilities of the company [5, p. 243].<br />

Complicated structure of conglomerates, which occur after the merger, very often<br />

requires more administrative personnel. The preserved remains specialized, however often<br />

mutually competing departments. On the other hand are after mergers and acquisitions<br />

expected savings from reductions in staff or expenses costs (Table. 1). These benefits would<br />

mean social costs in terms of increased unemployment. The problem in terms of social costs<br />

is also closing branches, usually associated with reducing supply of banking services, job<br />

cuts may not be the rule.<br />

Table 1. Estimates of cost savings in bank mergers (in% of total costs)<br />

SBC-UBS 23<br />

Bank of Scotland-NatWest 22<br />

Bank Austria-Credit Anstalt 18<br />

BankAmerika-SecPac 17<br />

Wells-First Interstate 17<br />

Chemical-Chase 16<br />

Swedbank-Forenings 15<br />

Lloyds-Midland 14<br />

Vereinsbank-Hypobank 14<br />

Fortis-Generale 11<br />

Source: Davis, S. I. 2007 [2, p. 97]<br />

The most important argument for the merger is synergy. Synergistic effect is based on the<br />

premise that combining two formerly separate companies involves an increase effect on the<br />

coupling value that is added to the sum of the merging companies. It is known that such<br />

effects arise when combining two companies, for example, that in newly established<br />

company arise economies of scale, reduce some costs, lower distribution costs and marketing<br />

costs, disposal of surplus or unused assets, or just using them. We can say that the 90th were<br />

synergies reason and argument of many mergers in the financial sector. Acquisition of a


36<br />

Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 34-43)<br />

major market positions, or the emergence of oligopoly or even monopoly, should be reflected<br />

in the growth of the value of the bank and decrease the value of competing banks - however<br />

most of the studies decrease the value of rival banks didn’t demonstrate [1, p. 135].<br />

The motive for mergers and acquisitions may also be to circumvent quotas, tariffs and<br />

other restrictions in foreign trade, reduce dependence on foreign trade or invest in a safe and<br />

predictable environment. For successfully manage of merger is very important to make<br />

valuation of both banks, which want to merge. Financial valuation of bank aims to make its<br />

value by a sum of money. The potential of bank is then evaluate by cash equivalents.<br />

Valuation methods can be divided into these main groups [4, p. 12-13]:<br />

1. methods based on income analysis,<br />

2. methods based primarily on an analysis of current market prices,<br />

3. valuation methods based on cost (the cost of purchasing the property).<br />

Researched bank mergers were divided into groups according to the region in which they<br />

took place. The first group included the mergers in developed economies such as Japan,<br />

USA, GB, Spain and Republic of South Africa.<br />

The second group included mergers acquisitions in transition economies of Central and<br />

Eastern Europe. The oldest is the acquisition of CSOB by Belgian KBC in 1999 in the Czech<br />

Republic. In it, KBC has acquired 65.69% stake for 40 billion CZK. Followed by series of<br />

Austrian ErsteBank acquisitions in the Czech Republic, Slovakia and Romania. The other<br />

from region are the acquisition of Komerční banka by French Societe Generale in 2001 in the<br />

Czech Republic, where there was a transfer of 60% of the shares for 40 billion CZK and fresh<br />

UniBanka merger with HVB Bank in Slovakia in 2007.<br />

Table 2. The value of mergers under the merged total assets (EUR million)<br />

Merging banks Total assets Total<br />

Mitsubishi Tokyo FG + UFJ Holdings 2005 (Japan) 779 338 593 396 1 372 734<br />

JP Morgan Chase + Bank One 2004 (USA) 955 077 269 512 1 224 589<br />

Sumitomo + Sakura Bank 2001 (Japan) 500 886 414 775 915 661<br />

Royal Bank of Scotland + NatWest 2000 (GB) 532 455 309 873 842 328<br />

Barclays + ABSA 2005 (JAR) 785 852 51 009 836 861<br />

Santander + Abbey 2004 (Spain) 504 704 248 857 753 561<br />

SG + KB 2001 (Czech) 512 500 12 175 524 675<br />

ErsteG + BCR 2006 (Romania) 181 703 13 519 195 222<br />

KBC + CSOB 1999 (Czech) 156 218 6 557 162 775<br />

ErsteG + SS 2001 (Slovakia) 80 114 4 643 84 757<br />

ErsteG + CS 2000 (Czech) 54 935 12 410 67 345<br />

UniBanka +HVB Bank 2007 (Slovakia) 1 504 2 178 3 682<br />

Capital adequacy<br />

Source: own calculations based on annual reports of banks<br />

Sense of capital adequacy is based on the assumption that the larger the capital of<br />

financial institutions, the more resources shareholders put in. And the greater will be their


Tej, J., Economic Assessment of Selected Bank Mergers, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No, 1-2, 34-43) 37<br />

interest for the proper operation of the institution not to lose this money, but to maximize<br />

their value.<br />

Graph 1. Capital adequacy ratio (%)<br />

16<br />

15<br />

14<br />

13<br />

12<br />

11<br />

10<br />

-3 -2 -1 year of<br />

merger<br />

Central and Eastern Europe<br />

Source: author<br />

1 2 3<br />

developed countries<br />

In case of problems means lower value of capital adequacy for the shareholders and<br />

depositors a higher probability of loss. When bank will be successful in its activities, the<br />

lower value of the capital adequacy means for shareholders higher probability of evaluation<br />

invested investments, but for clients only their deposit interest. Raising capital adequacy<br />

means better security for clients, but on the other hand it means a reduction in institutions<br />

profit contributing to the unit of capital [9, p. 195].<br />

From the previous graph 1 captivate an increase in capital adequacy of banks from<br />

Central and Eastern Europe. This can be explained by the some restructuring and reducing<br />

the risk before merger, or consistent acquisition partner selection. However, the level of the<br />

years after the merger seems to be overly cautious, since the recommended minimum<br />

threshold is at 8%. Conversely, banks from developed world economies reported relatively<br />

stable levels without significant trends at around 12%.<br />

Profitability ratio indicators<br />

From all of profitability indicators, each of which focuses on a different type of<br />

profitability, was included in the analysis one of representative from each category.<br />

Representations of the course are also most worldwide prevalent ROE and ROA.<br />

Graph 2. shows the development of Bank’s profitability ratio indicator R1 (net banking<br />

product * 100/ bankʹs business income) three years prior to the merger till period of three<br />

years after the merger. It is clearly visible that the group of banks from Central and Eastern<br />

Europe after the merger increased the share of net banking product up to 75%. In the second<br />

group of banks throughout the whole period a clear downward trend with small stagnation


38<br />

Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 34-43)<br />

in mergerʹs year, which means focusing on other areas, mainly on income from fees and<br />

commissions, or profits from financial operations.<br />

Graph 2. Bank’s profitability ratio indicator R1<br />

80<br />

70<br />

60<br />

50<br />

40<br />

-3 -2 -1 year of merger 1 2 3<br />

Central and Eastern Europe<br />

developed countries<br />

Source: author<br />

Graph 3. Bank’s profitability ratio indicator R3<br />

30<br />

20<br />

10<br />

0<br />

-3 -2 -1 year of<br />

merger<br />

Central and Eastern Europe<br />

Source: author<br />

1 2 3<br />

developed countries<br />

R3 indicator works with net profit before tax (R3 = net profit before tax * 100 / bankʹs<br />

business income + operating income + other income) and thus eliminates any tax differentials<br />

in all countries. Already one year before the merger can be seen profit growth in both groups<br />

of banks, which continued also in subsequent years. So this indicator describes the merger as<br />

a great way how to increase net profit before tax.


Tej, J., Economic Assessment of Selected Bank Mergers, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No, 1-2, 34-43) 39<br />

Graph 4. Personal profitability R4<br />

500<br />

450<br />

400<br />

350<br />

300<br />

250<br />

-3 -2 -1 year of<br />

merger<br />

Central and Eastern Europe<br />

Source: author<br />

1 2 3<br />

developed countries<br />

Personal profitability ratio shows the effect which brings unit of labour in proportion to<br />

net banking product (graph 4). In international comparisons it is necessary to use net profit<br />

before tax due to different levels of taxation in different countries, and also apply profit to<br />

one employee. This comparison may indicate overstaffed banks or not very successful<br />

interbank organization, poor levels of technical equipment or in the extreme case low skilled<br />

and expertise of employees. Optimization of branch network and reducing the number of<br />

employees is among the core theme of mergers. One might assume that after the merger it<br />

comes just increase of this parameter. However, in a group of banks from Central and<br />

Eastern Europe was no bigger increase acting, even in the merger year there was a slight<br />

decline. And since labor costs were not growing by way to be able to explain this trend,<br />

mergers in this direction had not brought the desired effect. Conversely group of banks from<br />

developed economies, recorded an increase to almost twice its value from the year before the<br />

merger and the trend seems to be strong enough also for the future.<br />

Graph 5. Return on equity – ROE<br />

30<br />

20<br />

10<br />

0<br />

-10<br />

-20<br />

-30<br />

-3 -2 -1 year of<br />

merger<br />

Central and Eastern Europe<br />

Source: author<br />

1 2 3<br />

developed countries


40<br />

Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 34-43)<br />

Graph 5. shows the performance of banks as measured by ROE. It indicates to<br />

shareholders how effective their investments in shares are. Visible is a positive increase in<br />

banks in Central and Eastern Europe. Already one year before the merger they reached a<br />

significant positive value and growth trend is maintained until the end of the period. By<br />

contrast the group of mergers in developed economies has value of ROE still in the range 10<br />

to 20% without significant changes in the mergerʹs year. Thus the merger did not bring any<br />

significant effect to shareholders in the long run.<br />

Graph 6. Return on assets – ROA<br />

1,2<br />

1,0<br />

0,8<br />

0,6<br />

0,4<br />

0,2<br />

-3 -2 -1 year of<br />

merger<br />

Central and Eastern Europe<br />

Source: author<br />

1 2 3<br />

developed countries<br />

The fundamental problem of the indicator ROE as the primary indicator of bank<br />

profitability, is that it does not take into account a possible leverage factor. The Bank may<br />

indeed very easily increase its ROE by increasing the total debt, namely use capital to cover a<br />

higher amount of assets. Therefore, the analysis must be considered simultaneously with the<br />

second indicator - ROA. Graph 6 - ROA shows how effectively assets are used to make a<br />

profit, then how much one unit of assets earns in average. The international standard is<br />

regarded as a value of 1.00 and as we can see, central European banks are reaching that point<br />

immediately one year after merger. In contrast with second group which are slightly below<br />

the standard and don’t exceed value of 0.8 throughout whole period of time. The following<br />

shape of curve caused Japanese banks and their long-lasting crisis in its banking sector,<br />

which is marked by huge credit losses and overcapacity.<br />

Market value indicator<br />

The most important indicator from this category is now considered the market price of<br />

shares, which immediately takes into account all relevant information affecting their level<br />

and is a very important tool for investors (graph 7).


Tej, J., Economic Assessment of Selected Bank Mergers, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No, 1-2, 34-43) 41<br />

Graph 7. Market price of shares<br />

200<br />

180<br />

160<br />

140<br />

120<br />

100<br />

80<br />

-3 -2 -1 year of<br />

merger<br />

Central and Eastern Europe<br />

1 2 3<br />

developed countries<br />

Source: author<br />

Note except Slovenská sporiteľňa, BCR, HVB Bank and UNI Bank, which shares are not publicly traded.<br />

One year after the merger took place as expected, fall in central banks stock prices, but it<br />

was already deleted the next year and a year later, the average price reached 170% of the<br />

initial value. The curve of banks from developed economies has fall in mergerʹs year, but the<br />

following period was marked by a sharp strengthening price of shares up to 190% of initial<br />

value in the third year after the merger.<br />

Graph 8. Total loans / total assets ratio<br />

60<br />

55<br />

50<br />

45<br />

40<br />

35<br />

-3 -2 -1 year of<br />

merger<br />

Central and Eastern Europe<br />

Source: author<br />

1 2 3<br />

developed countries<br />

One of the most important indicator for financing small and medium-sized enterprises<br />

(SME) belongs the volume of total loans to total assets (graph 8). Which are in the banking<br />

practice divided in loans to households and small entrepreneurs, large corporate clients,<br />

special funding and loans to SMEʹs. Now we pay attention just to the last item which is drew<br />

in graph 9.


42<br />

Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 34-43)<br />

Graph 9. SME’s loans / total assets ratio<br />

16<br />

15<br />

14<br />

13<br />

12<br />

11<br />

10<br />

9<br />

-3 -2 -1 year of<br />

merger<br />

Central and Eastern Europe<br />

Source: author<br />

1 2 3<br />

developed countries<br />

The share of SMEʹs loans to total assets has a very similar trend as total loans to total<br />

assets. We can observe a significant trend of divergence in two groups since year before the<br />

merger, which is getting stronger every following year. Mergers in the our region didn’t<br />

contributed to a better allocation of loans for small and medium-sized enterprises, but<br />

commercial banks are now paying increasing attention to the segment of small and mediumsized<br />

enterprises [8]. Which do not provide such large volumes of transactions as large<br />

corporate customers, but better margins and future potential. This led in 2008 to increase of<br />

lending volume to this segment about the fifth, sometimes up to 30 %.<br />

Conclusion<br />

The success of the merger affects many factors. We could say most important are<br />

managing rationalization of operations, gaining access to new banking techniques,<br />

optimizing economies of scale, portfolio diversification, synergy, and not least the success of<br />

the merger determine choosing of financing method of the merger. Assessment of the merger<br />

success after several years of difficult, but most obvious way seems to be using different<br />

analytical methods and ratio indicators that can provide a fairly comprehensive view of<br />

economic performance following years after the merger compared to the years before the<br />

merger.<br />

All indicators should be monitored and assessed in longer period of time and it should be<br />

noted that even slight changes in the indicator level may indicate changes in the range of<br />

customers or changes in the financial market. The capital adequacy is showing some<br />

differences between merger groups. Central and Eastern Europe region in the second year<br />

after the merger amounted value exceeding 15 %, so although in the eyes of clients were<br />

more secure, on the other hand, this meant reduction in institutions profit contributing to the<br />

unit of capital. Profitability indicators also speak in favor of the merger in Central and<br />

Eastern Europe region. Mergers in our region didn’t contributed to a better allocation of


Tej, J., Economic Assessment of Selected Bank Mergers, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No, 1-2, 34-43) 43<br />

loans for small and medium-sized enterprises, but commercial banks are now paying<br />

increasing attention to the segment of small and medium-sized enterprises.<br />

Better results of banks in transition countries in Central and Eastern Europe, is generally<br />

attributed to a significant restructuring and rationalization process, which took place before<br />

the merger itself to attract acquisition partners. To evaluate the impact of mergers on banksʹ<br />

financial results can be done not only with using these methods and indicators, but also in<br />

other ways.<br />

Summary<br />

The study gives an overview of the economic situation coupled with the merger of banks in the area<br />

of Central and Eastern Europe in comparison with developed markets in the world. It applies to<br />

different types of mergers of banks ratio indicators, the market value of shares and capital adequacy.<br />

Attention turns also to the issue of SMEʹs loans measured by the range of indicators.<br />

References<br />

BALÁŽ, P., VERČEK, P. Globalizácia a nová ekonomika. Bratislava: Sprint, 2002, s.135. ISBN 80-89085-06-<br />

7.<br />

DAVIS, S. I. Bank Mergers. Lessons for the Future. London: Macmillan 2000, s. 97. ISBN 978-0-312-23552-<br />

9.<br />

KOTULIČ, R., KIRÁLY, P., RAJČÍNIOVÁ, M. Finančná analýza podniku. Bratislava: Iura Edition, 2007. -<br />

206 s. - ISBN 978-80-8078-117-0.<br />

MAŘÍK, M. Určování hodnoty firem. 1. vyd. Praha: Ekopress, 1998, s. 12-13. ISBN 80-7079-938-2.<br />

POLOUČEK, S. Bankovnictví. 1. vyd. Karviná: SU v Opavě 2005, s. 243. ISBN 80-7248-264-5.<br />

POLOUČEK, S. a kol. Bankovnictví. 1. vydání. Praha: C. H. Beck, 2006, s. 490. ISBN 80-7179-462-7.<br />

RÁKOŠ, J. Základy finančnej analýzy. In: Manažment projektov v regiónoch. Prešov: Manacon, 2005, s.<br />

83-100. ISBN 80-89040-27-6.<br />

TEJ, J., BRECIK, M., KRASNODĘBSKI, A. Small and medium enterprise - one of the aspects of the regional<br />

development. In: Acta Agraria et Silvestria. Vol. XLIV/2: series agraria; sekcja ekonomiczna. -<br />

Kraków: Wydawnictwo Oddzialu Polskiej Akademii Nauk, 2005.<br />

TEJ, J. ml., TEJ, J. Ekonomické zhodnotenie fúzií vybraných bánk v regióne. In: ANNO 2009. Prešov: PU v<br />

Prešove 2009, s.191-202. Dostupné na: http://www.pulib.sk/elpub2/FM/Kotulic10/index.html, ISBN<br />

978-80-555-0005-8.<br />

Article history:<br />

Received: 11 January 2010<br />

Accepted: 23 March 2010


ORIGINAL SCIENFITIC PAPER<br />

Matrix Theory Application in the Bootstrapping Method for the<br />

Term Structure of Interest Rates *<br />

Glova Jozef, Technical university of Košice, Faculty of Economics, Slovak Republic<br />

UDC: 336.781.5 JEL: C41, D35, G12<br />

ABSTRACT – This article focuses on the term structure of interest rates analysis in the form of a<br />

yield curve. The yield curve is a basic instrument for understanding the relationship between the price<br />

of money and the maturity of a financial instrument. It has the same relevance for all economic<br />

subjects in the form of a basic value determination. The term structure analysis can be used in<br />

different economic categories like financial management, portfolio management, actuary science,<br />

company valuation, management of firm value, financial risk management, etc. Such as basic method<br />

applied in the yield curve construction is the bootstrapping method. Unfortunately, there is great<br />

computing severity related to this method. Fortunately, however, the application of matrix theory<br />

helps us to solve this issue very well<br />

KEY WORDS: yield curve, interest rate term structure analysis, bootstrapping method<br />

Introduction<br />

The term structure of interest rates, also known as yield curve, is a static function that<br />

relates the term to maturity to the yield to maturity for a sample of bonds at a given point in<br />

time. Thus, it represents a cross section of yields for a category of bonds that are comparable<br />

in all respects but maturity.<br />

Specifically, the quality of the issues should be constant, and ideally you should have<br />

issues with similar coupons and call features within a single industry category. So you can<br />

construct different yield curves for Treasuries, government agencies, prime grade<br />

municipals, AAA utilities, and so on. The accuracy of the yield curve will just depend on the<br />

comparability of the bonds in the sample.<br />

In generally yield curves do not have the same shape at different points in time, thus<br />

term structure shape changes depends the time and depends the term to maturity. Depends<br />

on different term to maturity we knows the rising yield curve, declining yield curve, the flat<br />

yield curve or the humped yield curve. The rising yield curve is the most common and tends<br />

to prevail when interest rates are at low or modest levels. The declining yield curve tends to<br />

occur when rates are relatively high. The flat yield curve rarely exists for any period of time.<br />

The humped yield curve prevails when extremely high rates are expected to decline to more<br />

normal levels. Note that the slope of the yield curve tends to level off in general after 15<br />

years.<br />

*<br />

Acknowledgement: This article was written with the support of the VEGA project No. 1/0897/10.


Glova, J., Matrix Theory Application in the Bootstrapping, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No, 1-2, 44-49) 45<br />

Different shape of the term structure or yield curve explains three major yield curve<br />

theories - the expectations hypothesis, the liquidity preference hypothesis, and the<br />

segmented market hypothesis [John Y. Campbell (1986)], [John C. Cox, Jonathan E. Ingersoll,<br />

Stephen A. Ross (1985)].<br />

Theoretical spot rate curve estimation using bootstrapping method<br />

The yield on a zero coupon bond for a given maturity is the spot rate for the maturity.<br />

Specifically, the spot rate is defined as the discount rate for a cash flow at a specific maturity.<br />

At that time, we used the rates on a series of zero coupon government bonds created by<br />

stripping coupon government bonds.<br />

In this case, we will construct a theoretical spot rate curve from the observable yield<br />

curve that is based on the existing yields of Treasury bills and the most recent Treasury<br />

coupon securities [Sanjay K. Nawalkha and Donald R. Chambers (1999)]. One might expect<br />

the theoretical spot rate curve and the spot rate curve derived from the stripped zero coupon<br />

bonds to be the same.<br />

The fact is, while they are close, they will not be exactly the same because the stripped<br />

zero coupon bonds will not be as liquid as the on-the-run issues. In addition, there are<br />

instances where institutions will have a strong desire for a particular spot maturity and this<br />

preference will distort the term structure relationship. Therefore, while it is possible to use<br />

the stripped zero coupon curve for a general indication, if you are going to use the spot rates<br />

for significant valuation, you would want to use the theoretical spot rate curve.<br />

The process of creating a theoretical spot rate curve from coupon securities is called<br />

bootstrapping wherein it is assumed that the value of the Treasury coupon security should<br />

be equal to the value of the package of zero coupon securities that duplicates the coupon<br />

bond’s cash flow.<br />

The theoretical price of zero coupon bond ( ) should equal to<br />

where .<br />

, (1)<br />

Consider set of coupon securities with semi annual coupon payment and continuous<br />

interest running. Then the 0,5 year coupon security should equal to 0,5 year zero coupon<br />

security containing the face value and 0,5 year coupon payment . The general relation for the<br />

theoretical price of this bond [Vincent Šoltés a Michal Šoltés (2007)] is<br />

The theoretical price of 0,5 year coupon bond is then<br />

where is the face value, is 0,5 year coupon payment paid at the maturity of bond,<br />

and is the theoretical spot rate of 0,5 year zero coupon bond or 0,5 year zero coupon<br />

yield. After simplifying<br />

(2)<br />

(3)<br />

(4)


46<br />

Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 44-49)<br />

To calculate the 1 year zero coupon we can use the price of a 1 year coupon bond and the<br />

theoretical spot rate of 0,5 year zero coupon bond, i.e.<br />

where is the face value, is the 0,5 year coupon paid at the end of 0,5 year and 1 year,<br />

and is the 1 year zero coupon yield. After simplifying we get<br />

(5)<br />

(6)<br />

Using 0,5 zero coupon yield form equation (4) in the equation (6) we compute the<br />

theoretical spot rate of 1 year zero coupon bond.<br />

Following the same approach the theoretical spot rates (or zero coupon yields) fall of the<br />

N maturities are calculated using the zero coupon yields of the previous maturities. In<br />

general about 15 maturities are sufficient to produce the whole yield curve of zero coupon<br />

bonds.<br />

Using the matrix theory in the bootstrapping method<br />

To obtain a direct solution we can apply matrix theory there. Let we consider bonds<br />

maturing at dates , and let be the total cash flow payments of ith bond (for<br />

) on the date (for ). Then the prices of bonds equal to<br />

(7)<br />

Generally described matrix equals to matrix product of matrix and matrix , then<br />

After simplifying to the matrix<br />

,<br />

where the matrix presents the square matrix to the matrix . To determine the inverse,<br />

we calculate using determinant of<br />

,<br />

, where (9)<br />

and where represents square matrix of type from the matrix .<br />

As you could see in (7), the upper triangle of the cash flow matrix on the right side has<br />

zero values. By multiplying both sides of equation (7) by the inverse matrix of the cash flow,<br />

we get the discount functions corresponding to maturities, then<br />

(8)<br />

(10)


Glova, J., Matrix Theory Application in the Bootstrapping, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No, 1-2, 44-49) 47<br />

Note that this solution requires that the number of bonds equal the number of cash flow<br />

maturity dates.<br />

Matrix theory application in the bootstrapping method<br />

To demonstrate the bootstrapping method using the matrix approach we assume 10<br />

coupon bonds and their parameters given in the table below. For simplicity we assume all<br />

bonds make annual coupon payments. The face value of bonds is 100 €.<br />

Bond Price (in €) Maturity(in years) Coupon rate (in per cent p.a.)<br />

1 96,60 1 2<br />

2 93,71 2 2,5<br />

3 91,56 3 3<br />

4 90,24 4 3,5<br />

5 89,74 5 4<br />

6 90,04 6 4,5<br />

7 91,09 7 5<br />

8 92,82 8 5,5<br />

9 95,19 9 6<br />

10 98,14 10 6,5<br />

Using the matrix theory in the bootstrapping method given by equation (10) we get the<br />

discount functions corresponding to maturities, then<br />

Multiplication of these two matrices gives the solution<br />

The theoretical spot rates are obtained from the corresponding discount functions<br />

derived from equation (1) or


48<br />

Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 44-49)<br />

The particular zero coupon yields are depictured in Table 1. and Figure 1.<br />

Table 1. Particular zero coupon yields (in per cent p. a.)<br />

1 5,439%<br />

2 5,762%<br />

3 5,995%<br />

4 6,164%<br />

5 6,294%<br />

6 6,393%<br />

7 6,470%<br />

8 6,533%<br />

9 6,582%<br />

10 6,621%<br />

Figure 1. Theoretical spot rate curve<br />

Conclusion<br />

The yield curve (or the term structure of interest rates) shows the relationship between the<br />

yields on a set of comparable bonds and the term to maturity. Based upon this yield curve, it<br />

is possible to derive a theoretical spot rate curve. Such as basic method applied for derivation<br />

of the yield curve (or several theoretical spot rates) is the bootstrapping method.<br />

Unfortunately, there is great computing severity related to this method. Fortunately,<br />

however, the application of matrix theory helps us to solve this issue very well, as we<br />

suggested in this paper. In turn, these spot rates can be used to value bonds using an<br />

individual spot rate for each cash flow. This valuation approach is becoming more useful in a<br />

world where bonds have very different cash flows. In addition, these spot rates imply<br />

investor expectations about future rates referred to as forward rates.


References<br />

Glova, J., Matrix Theory Application in the Bootstrapping, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No, 1-2, 44-49) 49<br />

Campbell, J. Y. (1986), “A Defense of Traditional Hypotheses about the Term Structure of Interest<br />

Rates,” <strong>Journal</strong> of Finance, 41: 183–193.<br />

Cox, J. C., Ingersoll, J. E. and S. A. Ross (1985), “A Theory of the Term Structure of Interest Rates,”<br />

Econometrica, 53: 385–408.<br />

Nawalkha, S. K., and D. R. Chambers (1999), “Interest Rate Risk Measurement and Management”,<br />

New York: Institutional Investor.<br />

Šoltés, V., Šoltés, M. (2007), “Maximum and Limit Value of the Duration of the Coupon Bond, In:<br />

Economics and Management, 10 (4): 87–91.<br />

Article history:<br />

Received: 12 January 2010<br />

Accepted: 15 March 2010


ORIGINAL SCIENTIFIC PAPER<br />

Method of Banks Valuation<br />

Horvátová Eva * , University of Economics in Bratislava, Faculty of National Economy,<br />

Department of Banking and International Finance, Bratislava, Slovakia<br />

UDC: 336.717 JEL: G21<br />

ABSTRACT – Since there is not a special common framework for valuation banks and it gives<br />

possibilities to create establishment, improvement and adaptation of various approaches to measuring<br />

the value of banks and financial institutions.<br />

Most approaches banks valuation note the strong dependence of financial institutions value from<br />

market interest rates (Mishkin, F., Miller, WD, Copeland, T., Koller, T., Damodaran, A., and others).<br />

Each approache reflects greater or lesser degree of accuracy depending on the method of determining<br />

resources for owners, the discount factor, approaches to defining the rate of growth and methods of<br />

measurement.<br />

KEY WORDS: banks valuation methods, free cash flow equity, discounting factor, cost on equity,<br />

beta factor<br />

Introduction<br />

The issue of banks and financial institutions valuation have been written relatively few<br />

comprehensive theoretical and methodological work. The valuation is carried out by experts<br />

and expertise for different purposes and with varying degrees of methodological accuracy of<br />

the estimate of input factors. A significant shift in valuation theory and practice came when<br />

R. C. Merton (1973) [1], introduced the risk-neutral valuation model for financial assets. Bank<br />

valuation under this model can be interpreted as determining the value of a call option on<br />

the value of bank assets. 1<br />

Currently, (August 2009), R. C. Merton (2009) in the context of the financial crisis makes<br />

the promotion of a market valuation of banks and their components. It states that banks and<br />

entities that oppose the use of market valuation, are trying to hide the fall in prices. Equally<br />

critically views on issues of aid, saying that the government is trying to solve complex<br />

problems easily. He also expressed the desire to stimulate trading in securities market in<br />

order to restore the natural function of the market in setting prices. About using of<br />

derivatives, the lack of market information for investors blames frozen market. 2<br />

* Address: Dolnozemská cesta 1, 85235 Bratislava, Slovakia., e-mail: eva.horvatova@euba.sk<br />

1<br />

Merton, R. C. An intertemporal Capital Assets Pricing Model. Econometrica. Vol. 41, 1973.<br />

http://ideas.repec.org/a/ecm/emetrp/v41y1973i5p867-87.html<br />

2<br />

Merton, R. C.: Mark it to market. August, 19, 2009.<br />

http://www.swampreport.com/investments/scholes-and-merton-mark-it-to-market/


Horvátová, E., Method of Banks Valuation, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No, 1-2, 50-60) 51<br />

A. Damodaran (2002) says, that „the fundamental valuation rules may be applied equally<br />

to companies such as to financial services institutions“ 3 , should be pointed here.<br />

Some approaches to the bank valuation note the strong dependence of financial<br />

institutions value from market interest rates (Mishkin, F., Miller, WD, Copeland, T., Koller,<br />

T., Damodaran, A., and others).<br />

Each approache reflects greater or lesser degree of accuracy depending on the method of<br />

determining resources for owners, the discount factor, approaches to defining the rate of<br />

growth and methods of measurement.<br />

T. Copeland highlights that the interest rate risk should focus attention on 4 factors: 1<br />

interest margin between the market rate and bank rate, as well as their flexibility to market<br />

developments, 2 dynamics of tidal funds, 3 degree of substitution of banking products and<br />

services as an alternative to interest-rate changes, 4 need to cover risks arising from maturity<br />

mismatch of assets and liabilities part of the profit.<br />

Koch, T. W. (2005), Samuelson, Klein and Monti formulate a conclusion on the positive<br />

relationship between net income and the relative market power of banks. These theoretical<br />

ideas support empirical research work such as Damodaran, A., as well as other authors. A<br />

significant shift in valuation theory and practice came when R. C. Merton (1973) [2]<br />

introduced the risk-neutral valuation model for financial assets. Bank valuation under this<br />

model can be interpreted as determining the value of a call option on the value of bank<br />

assets. 4<br />

Valuation of banks and financial institutions by the yield method<br />

Business valuation models are largely based on discounted cash flow approach (DCF model)<br />

and assume some growth stages, which is typical for different growth rate of cash flow or<br />

resources for owners.<br />

Expression of FCFE (Free Cash Flow Equity) in financial institutions<br />

The annual effect on the owner may be defined differently. This may be as free cash flow<br />

to shareholders (FCFE - Free Cash Flow Equity) generated as operating profit by reducing<br />

the costs that are not spending in the current period and the investment needed work and<br />

investment property for the operation.<br />

According W.D. Miller, the desire is to move closer to the category income of owners net<br />

proceeds, which could be as bank potencial of dividends. Sometimes, in this case refers to the<br />

free cash flow to shareholders (Free Cash Flow Equity).<br />

Using cash flow as a basis for calculating income of owners as dividend income potential<br />

for the owners of the bank is inappropriate for two reasons:<br />

3<br />

Damodaran, A.: Investment Valuation. 2-nd edition. John Wiley & Sons, 2002, 2002. ISBN 978-0-471-<br />

75121-2, page 603.<br />

4<br />

Merton, R. C. An intertemporal Capital Assets Pricing Model. Econometrica. Vol. 41, 1973.<br />

http://ideas.repec.org/a/ecm/emetrp/v41y1973i5p867-87.html


52<br />

Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 50-60)<br />

• Statement of cash flows in the banking business is not suitable for determining<br />

sources for owners, such as dividends as source for owners can be paid only from<br />

real net income after tax and not from the movement of cash (cash flow);<br />

• Bank and company profits are not equally attainable by shareholders, in the bank<br />

there is no problem with the availability of cash to shareholders because of the<br />

nature of the vast majority of assets and liabilities, although other types of<br />

businesses can generate significant differences between cash flow and profits in<br />

the sense that the business generates profits, but not sufficient cash flow;<br />

• The main source of income in banking is the differences between interest income<br />

and expense, as well as fees for services.<br />

The valuation of financial institutions can not be made without respect of interest income<br />

and expense as the most significant component of their income and capital growth, or its<br />

renewal. The calculation of FCFE in banks and financial institutions can be implemented in<br />

two basic ways:<br />

1-st method of expressing FCFE:<br />

FCFE = net income - growth of capital + other income<br />

It should be noted that net income is not equal to cash flow. With the growth of financial<br />

institutions should also increase its capital. Growth FCFE lowers the capital, because it<br />

means that the bank is inserted into the banking business of profits that would otherwise be<br />

paid to owners as dividends. Otherwise, if the bankʹs growth has not been accompanied by<br />

an adequate increase in the capital, it could happen to failure of financial institutions due to<br />

lack of solvency.<br />

2-nd method of calculating FCFE:<br />

FCFE = resources from issue of shares - preference shares + dividends - capital increase (+<br />

decrease in capital)<br />

Changes in bank capital are resulting from the relationship between balance, profit and<br />

loss statements, cash flow and value of financial institutions. Changes in assets and liabilities<br />

are reflected in changes in equity.<br />

Equally polemical recommendation is adding into the value of cash flows the initial cash<br />

balance. The problem is the fact that they were a combination of yield method valuation and<br />

substance valuation method.<br />

Since the yield valuation takes into account the future potential of banks, it leads to the<br />

discussions on the question of the length of the period under review (planning period).<br />

For example, W. D. Miller (1995) [1] 5 advised to examine 10 years, others, such as M.<br />

Tucek 6 recommend 2-3 years. This follows from the specifics of the environment, for<br />

example, in U.S. valuation concerns small, local banks are not investment activities and<br />

5<br />

Miller, W. D.: Commercial Bank Valuation. John Villey and Sons, Inc., 1995, ISBN13 9780471128205,<br />

page 28.<br />

6<br />

Hrdý, M.: Oceňování finančních institucí. Praha: Grada Publishing, 2005, ISBN 80-247-0938-4, page<br />

35.


Horvátová, E., Method of Banks Valuation, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No, 1-2, 50-60) 53<br />

planning for 10 years it may be relatively simply. Banks in Slovakia perform mixed<br />

operations, and planning the future results for longer than 5 years could cause problems.<br />

Net income as a basis for potential dividend or resource for owners by Koller, T.,<br />

Goedhard, M. and Wessels, D. (2005) [1] can establish two basic ways: 7<br />

1. On net interest income, or<br />

2. Model based on interest margins (Spread Model).<br />

Determination of the discount factor<br />

A particular problem is the correct determination of the discount factor to be within the<br />

individual models recommended. It is necessary to respect the logical links between the<br />

numerators and denominators and formulas used to discount the recommended indicators.<br />

There are different approaches for determining the interest rate for discounting, such as the<br />

determination of weighted average cost of capital. This method provides, in particular<br />

disposable cash flow for businesses, called the principle of Free Cash Flow of Firms (FCFF).<br />

The bank is not appropriate given the high gearing ratio (leverage). For the purposes of the<br />

valuation of banks need to set the cost of equity.<br />

Estimate the required rate of return on equity re<br />

In terms of banking, there are significant differences in the proportion of own and foreign<br />

sources of funding compared to other businesses. In the banking sector given the nature of<br />

the business of banking must accept a higher gearing ratio.<br />

Cost of capital represents the expected rate of income investors given the risk level of the<br />

investment. Since any form of business is associated with a higher risk than when depositing<br />

money in the bank, then the expected return is higher than interest rates in the bank.<br />

The role of the so-called risk-free rate rf (free of risk) may be selected interest rates on<br />

government bonds or yield to maturity of these types of bonds. Yield to maturity is<br />

recommended to use as a discount factor such as for example M. Marik (2007) [1]: ʺas a<br />

source for safe return to the Czech capital market, we recommend using such proceeds to<br />

maturity of government bonds with maturities equal to ten or more years by source Patria<br />

Finance.“ 8<br />

The cost of capital must be re invariably higher than rf in connection with the tax shield.<br />

Required rate of return on equity can provide a number of ways to serve its particular<br />

setting:<br />

• Gordon growth model,<br />

• CAPM (Capital Assets Pricing Model) or a model of capital assets<br />

• The average profitability<br />

• The cost of foreign funds<br />

7<br />

Koller, T., Goedhard, M., Wessels, D.: Valuation, Measuring and Managing the Value of Companies.<br />

Fourth Edition, Mc Kinsey & Company John Willey & Sons, Inc., 2005, ISBN: 978-0-471-70218-4, pages<br />

670 - 671.<br />

8<br />

Mařík, M.: Metody oceňování podniku. Druhé upravené a rozšířené vydání. Praha: Ecopress, 2007,<br />

ISBN 978-80-86929-32-3, page 218.


54<br />

Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 50-60)<br />

• APT model (Arbitrage Pricing Theory).<br />

1. Gordon growth model is based on a calculation of the growth rate of dividends:<br />

r<br />

where:<br />

dividends<br />

t+1<br />

e<br />

=<br />

+<br />

price of<br />

shares<br />

t<br />

g<br />

re = rate of return required by shareholders (return on equity)<br />

g = growth rate of dividends<br />

2. CAPM is used frequently, although it also has some shortcomings. This model assumes<br />

that the risk premium is proportional in relation to systematic risk β. The CAPM can be re<br />

established as follows:<br />

r<br />

e<br />

= r + β .<br />

f<br />

[ E( r ) − r ]<br />

m<br />

f<br />

where:<br />

Risk premium<br />

rf = risk-free interest rate<br />

re = rate of return required by shareholders (return on equity)<br />

β = systematic risk<br />

E (rm) = expected return on market portfolio<br />

3. The derivation of the discount rate based on average profitability. Data on the average<br />

profitability of the industry are relatively accessible, and therefore in practice often used to<br />

determine the cost of equity. The disadvantage of this method is the impact on accounting<br />

practices can distort the indicator ROE. The downside is mainly the lack of data on market<br />

value of capital of financial institutions, as the book value of capital is not suitable for these<br />

purposes.<br />

The basic conditions of DCF models include a requirement that the discount rate used to<br />

be in session with the risk profile of cash flow (for example: FCFF ↔ WACC or FCFE ↔ re). 9<br />

For the valuation of banks is appropriate to use a model based on FCFE. FCFE is generally<br />

recommended to enjoy when financial leverage is stable and this is relatively high. Using the<br />

FCFE model is preferred and recommended if it can generate a large difference between the<br />

dividends and FCFE.<br />

An alternative model is the dividend FCFE model. In practice, it could happen that the<br />

dividends could be higher than FCFE, the likely addition to the problems in the management<br />

of financial institutions and causing uncertainty in their valuations. It is recommended and<br />

preferred by Hrdý, M. (2005) [1] model for the dividend FCFE model. 10<br />

9<br />

Kislingerová, E.: Oceňování podniku. 2. přepracované a doplnené vydání. Praha: C. H. Beck, 2001,<br />

ISBN 80-7179-529-1, page 160.<br />

10<br />

Hrdý, M.: Oceňování finančních institucí. Praha: Grada Publishing, 2005, ISBN 80-247-0938-4, page<br />

23., and Koller, T., Goedhard, M., Wessels, D.: Valuation, Measuring and Managing the Value of<br />

Companies. Fourth Edition, Mc Kinsey & Company John Willey & Sons, Inc., 2005, ISBN: 978-0-471-


Horvátová, E., Method of Banks Valuation, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No, 1-2, 50-60) 55<br />

Using the FCFE valuation model, banks are avoiding the use of WACC.<br />

The average weighted cost of capital - WACC is always lower than the cost of equity – re,<br />

which corresponds with the result that they are reduced by the so-called tax shield resulting<br />

from the use of foreign funds and netting interest expenses to the bank.<br />

Determination of the beta coefficient<br />

Another problem is the calculation of the beta coefficient. For example M. Hrdý (2005) [2]<br />

11<br />

recommends using a simplified assumption that β is equal to one, because it assumes that<br />

changes in the profitability of financial institutions are equal to changes in market portfolio<br />

returns.<br />

Another argument in favor of simplifying the calculation of the beta coefficient is that<br />

fairly significant change of beta affects the overall change in the risk premium in the<br />

relatively small scale, and also a rather complex calculation of the coefficient beta. Above<br />

mentioned (the relatively low impact on the valuation premium) is shown on a graph.<br />

50<br />

40<br />

30<br />

20<br />

10<br />

Cost on equity (required return) by different<br />

degrees of risk (4 risk degrees) for maximum re<br />

0<br />

1 2 3 4<br />

max. r e is 20% max. re is 30%<br />

max. r e i is 40 %<br />

If the valuation is performed in less stable conditions, or if there are other reasons to<br />

choose a more accurate calculation of β, we use these basic approaches:<br />

1. Coefficient estimate based on historical data.<br />

2. By analogy.<br />

3. An analysis of factors.<br />

Beta coefficient expresses sensitivity to market risk. Actions that have beta between 0 and<br />

1.0 tend to move in the same direction as the market, but not to an extent.<br />

Rapidly growing company has beta over 5 years at level 1.11. The market growth of 1 %<br />

will increase the companyʹs stock price by 1.11 % or decrease by 2 % of the market reduces<br />

price of shares by 2.22 %. 12<br />

70218-4, page 668., and Mařík, M. and all.: Metody oceňování podniku. Druhé upravené a rozšířené<br />

vydání. Praha: Ekopress, 2007, ISBN 978-80-869929-3, page 206.<br />

11<br />

Hrdý , M.: Oceňování finančních institucí. Grada Publishing, Praha 2005, ISBN 80-247-0938-4, page<br />

10.<br />

12<br />

Brealey, R. A., Myers, S. C.: Teorie a praxe firemních financí. Praha: East Publishing, 1992, ISBN 80-<br />

85605-24-4, page 153.


56<br />

Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 50-60)<br />

Beta coefficient may be measured on the basis of historical data and hence the change in<br />

performance of individual shares in the bank, depending on changes in market portfolio as<br />

follows:<br />

β<br />

n ×<br />

∑R(<br />

S)<br />

× R(<br />

mp)<br />

− ∑R(<br />

S)<br />

× ∑<br />

2<br />

n × ∑R(<br />

mp)<br />

− ( ∑R(<br />

mp))<br />

=<br />

2<br />

R(<br />

mp)<br />

where:<br />

β - a quantitative measure of the volatility of portfolio<br />

R (S) - return on shares of a particular bank<br />

R (mp) - return on market portfolio,<br />

n - number of years of evolution.<br />

The disadvantage of this method is that it is not possible to reliably use knowledge about<br />

the development of beta from past to the future.<br />

The beta factor derives also by analogy from the following relationship by Marik, M.<br />

(2007) [2] 13<br />

⎛ D<br />

β<br />

L<br />

= β<br />

u<br />

⋅⎜1+<br />

⎟ β<br />

d<br />

1<br />

⎝ E ⎠<br />

Where:<br />

⎞<br />

D<br />

( 1−<br />

t) ⋅ − ⋅ ( − t) ⋅ E<br />

ΒU = Beta at zero debt (unlevered beta) 14<br />

ΒL = beta entity debt (levered beta)<br />

ΒD = beta for debt = 0<br />

t = tax rate<br />

This method of determining the beta is an appropriate indicator in the valuation of banks.<br />

Βeta coefficients are published for each industry and country.<br />

As the beta for foreign capital is 0, the resulting relationship is:<br />

⎛<br />

β = β<br />

u<br />

⋅⎜1+<br />

⎝<br />

L<br />

1<br />

D<br />

E<br />

⎞<br />

( − t) ⋅ ⎟<br />

⎠<br />

This relationship expresses the dependence of beta on the degree of indebtedness of the<br />

entity. With this option you can use data on individual sectors of beta. Coefficients are<br />

published for debted and indebted companies.<br />

The objective determination of β is the worldʹs best practice accepted valuation model<br />

CAPM. It is recommended that indicators of the environment of the U.S. market have been<br />

adjusted to current country risk. Capital costs are then expressed by:<br />

13<br />

Mařík, M.: Metody oceňování podniku. Druhé upravené a rozšířené vydání. Praha: Ecopress, 2007,<br />

ISBN 978-80-86929-32-3, page 225.<br />

14<br />

Data on the average values of β coefficients for each industry states are published on website of<br />

Aswath Damodaran (www.damodaran.com , Section Updated Data). The average value of β in 2009<br />

for European countries indicated 1.04 and the average βU is at 0.80.


Horvátová, E., Method of Banks Valuation, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No, 1-2, 50-60) 57<br />

re = rf<br />

+ β ⋅ RPM + RPC<br />

Where:<br />

RPM = market risk premium<br />

RPC = country risk premium is recommended to calculate than 1.5 times the risk of<br />

failure in the country (0,7.1,5) + 0.6 difference between inflation in the U.S. and for<br />

example in Slovakia.<br />

Determination of the cost of equity based on CAPM (on the example of Slovakia)<br />

Current risk-free return is 3.5 %;<br />

The risk premium for the capital market in Slovakia 7.21 % 15<br />

Country risk premium 2.21 %<br />

Unlevered beta for specialized banking services 0.23 %,<br />

The ratio of debt and equity 0.95 %.<br />

β<br />

r<br />

=<br />

L<br />

β u<br />

⎛ D ⎞<br />

⋅⎜1 + ⎟<br />

=<br />

⎝ E ⎠<br />

( 1−<br />

d ) ⋅ = 0,23⋅<br />

( 1+<br />

( 1−<br />

0,19)<br />

⋅ 0,95) 0, 41<br />

= r + ⋅ RPM + RPC = 3 ,5 + 0,41⋅<br />

7,21+<br />

2,21 = 8,67<br />

e f<br />

β<br />

The cost on equity methods based on CAPM model, are assuming the input data set to<br />

8.67 % in Slovakia.<br />

Practical problems and procedures of bank valuation<br />

A key practical problem when evaluating the bank will determine the future anticipated<br />

net effect on the owner, plans for future net earnings.<br />

Future development of profit can be detected in two ways:<br />

• Regression analysis;<br />

• A financial plan based on data compiled from balance sheet and profit and loss<br />

account.<br />

The method of regression analysis is appropriate for the valuation of banksʹ long-term<br />

stable conditions, and operating in developed economies. Regression analysis is more<br />

suitable for banks than for companies, because regulatory frameworks for business banking<br />

ensure continuous development without major fluctuations.<br />

Nevertheless, the most accurate and most reliable way to estimate deemed dividend<br />

potential is derived from the financial plan for the bank. The expert must be able to assess<br />

future development of bank finances and key items of bank profits. The aim should be to<br />

approximate the planned balance sheet and profit and loss account over the next 5 years.<br />

Important indicators are known profit generators such as loans and other earning assets,<br />

recently banks have a large proportion of income from fees for services, which should also be<br />

included in the calculations.<br />

15<br />

http://pages.stern.nyu.edu./adamodar/


58<br />

Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 50-60)<br />

The task of valuing the bank by the yield method is ultimately provided by continuing<br />

value to the bank. The formula for calculating the discounted value of continuing is as<br />

follows:<br />

CV<br />

=<br />

Where:<br />

CV<br />

Div5<br />

i<br />

g<br />

Div<br />

5<br />

. ( 1 + g)<br />

1<br />

.<br />

( i − g) ( ) 5<br />

1 + i<br />

- continuing value of bank<br />

- Expected dividend paid in the 5-th year<br />

- Interest rate used to discount<br />

- Expected dividend growth rate per year<br />

With a similar approach is also encountered in determining the value of ongoing<br />

(Continuing Value) in the work by T. Koller, M. Goedharda and D. Wessels (2005) [2]: 16<br />

СV<br />

⎛<br />

NI ⋅ ⎜1<br />

−<br />

=<br />

⎝<br />

g<br />

RONE<br />

( k g)<br />

e<br />

−<br />

⎞<br />

⎟<br />

⎠<br />

Where:<br />

NI - expected net revenue in 1-st year after the end the projected period<br />

g - expected dividend growth rate per year<br />

ke - cost of equity (required return)<br />

RONE - increasing the return on new capital<br />

Conclusions – why is bank valuation important<br />

At present, confidence in the banking and financial sector is simulated by states and their<br />

guarantees. Experience of banking sector restructuring in SR gives an example of how many<br />

banks are able to operate with inadequate or even having a negative value of capital.<br />

If it is well known that a major bank failure is undesirable because it would cause serious<br />

economic problems, then a function of confidence in the bank does not perform as bank<br />

capital, as some fiction or a social agreement, which may have different real form.<br />

The question arises whether the trust bank can reliably operate on this basis. It is<br />

undisputed and confirmed that the practice in the short term is possible. In the medium and<br />

long term, it is only a matter of time before such a basis for confidence in a banking<br />

institution is exhausted and positive incentives will be more costly than alternative problems<br />

for radical action against the bank.<br />

Such confidence is not inexhaustible; its boundaries are identical with states and<br />

capabilities of countries. There is a risk of such an approach, on the other hand, if the banks<br />

do not use this second chance, the financial crisis could be even greater.<br />

16<br />

Koller, T., Goedhard, M., Wessels, D.: Valuation, Measuring and Managing the Value of Companies.<br />

Fourth Edition, Mc Kinsey & Company John Willey & Sons, Inc., 2005, ISBN: 978-0-471-70218-4, page<br />

669.


Horvátová, E., Method of Banks Valuation, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No, 1-2, 50-60) 59<br />

At present, the consequences of the financial crisis occurred requirements (for example,<br />

Merton R.C.) to value banks by the market valuing approach, which uncovered a genuine<br />

reality and lead to more real situation on the financial and banking market. Such an<br />

approach would certainly be very appropriate.<br />

Valuation of banksʹ issues are important because the focus has to be not on profit growth,<br />

but on growth of stability and hence the value of the bank. Banks managers also should not<br />

have rewards based on profit but on the basis of value growth of institution, which they<br />

manage.<br />

Therefore, the states and supervisory institutions to carefully analyze the effectiveness of<br />

its intervention measures to support banking and financial market and take such measures<br />

that would prevent the repeat similar problems. Access to regulate the banking sector varies<br />

depending on the distance of negative experiences. This area will be clearly show degree of<br />

risk in dealing with its negative consequences. Addressing the negative consequences of the<br />

risks of using public funds is a sign that many economic entities, in principle, are not able to<br />

cover all the risks that they may occur, and therefore in my view, essential is that such<br />

entities to regulate the rate of risk-taking potential exist. It is necessary to believe that<br />

negative experiences will serve as a warning against gambling of people and countries, as in<br />

the historical experience translated it into a collective sacrifice of wealth necessary to prevent<br />

fatal consequences of similar threats.<br />

References<br />

Adams, M., Markus, R.: A new Approach to the Valuation of Banks. http://www.campusforfinance.com/fileadmin/content/cffrc/documents/2007/Banking_I_Adams.pdf<br />

Allen, F., Galle, D.: Comparing Financial Systems. Cambridge: MIT Press 2000. ISBN 0-262-01177-8.<br />

Benninga, S.: Bank Valuation. New York Instirute of Finance Course in Singapore,<br />

www.wharton.upenn.edu, February 13, 2001.<br />

Benninga, S. , Sarig, O.: Bank Valuation. February 13, 2001.<br />

http://senverb.boun.edu.tr/pdf/Bank%20Valuation.pdf<br />

Brealey, R. A., Myers, S. C.: Teorie a praxe firemních financí. Praha: East Publishing 1992, ISBN 80-<br />

85605-24-4.<br />

Calomiris, Ch. W., Doron Nissim: Activity Based Valuation of Bank Holding Companies. Working Paper<br />

12918. http://www.nber.org/papers/w12918.<br />

Davis, S. I.: Bank Mergers. Lessons for the Future. London: Macmillan 2000. ISBN 0-333-91260-8.<br />

Damodaran, A.: Investment Valuation. 2-nd edition. John Wiley & Sons 2002. ISBN 978-0-471-75121-2.<br />

www.damodaran.com (sekcia Updated Data).<br />

http://pages.stern.nyu.edu./adamodar/<br />

Freixas, X., Rochet, J. CH.: Microeconomics of Banking. Cambridge: MIT Press 1998. ISBN 0-262-06193-7.<br />

Horvátová, E.: Bankovníctvo. Žilina: GEORG 2009. ISBN 978-80-89401-03-1.<br />

Hrdý, M.: Oceňování finančních institucí. Praha: GRADA Publishing, 2005. ISBN 80-247-0938-4,<br />

Kidwll, D. S., Peterson, R. P., Blacwell, D.W.: Financial Institutions, Markets and Money. Forth Worth:<br />

The Dryden Press 1993.<br />

Koller, T., Goedhard, M., Wessels, D.: Valuation, Measuring and Managing the Value of Companies.<br />

Fourth edition. Mc Kinsey & Company John Willey & Sons, ISBN 0471702188, ISBN: 978-0-471-<br />

70218-4.<br />

Levy, H., Sarnat, M.: Kapitálové investice a finanční rozhodování. Praha: Grada Publishing 1999. ISBN 80-<br />

7169-504-1.


60<br />

Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 50-60)<br />

Kislingerová, E.: Oceňování podniku. Praha: C. H. Beck, 2001. ISBN 80-7179-529-1.<br />

Mařík, M.: Metody oceňování podniku. Druhé upravené a rozšířené vydání. Praha: Ecopress 2007, ISBN<br />

978-80-86929-32-3.<br />

Merton, R. C.: An intertemporal Capital Assets Pricing Model. Econometrica. Vol. 41, 1973.<br />

http://ideas.repec.org/a/ecm/emetrp/v41y1973i5p867-87.html<br />

Merton, R. C.: Mark it to market. August, 19, 2009. http://www.swampreport.com/investments/scholesand-merton-mark-it-to-market/<br />

Miller, W.D.: Commercial Bank Valuation. John Wiley and Sons, Inc., USA 1995, ISBN13 9780471128205.<br />

Mishkin, F.: Economics of Money, Banking and Financial Markets. Reading: Addison-Wesley 2003. ISBN<br />

0-321-20049-7.<br />

Rose, P. S., Hudgins, S. C.: Bank Management and Financial Services. Boston: McGraw Hill 2005. ISBN 0-<br />

07-286163-0.<br />

Sharpe, W.F., Alexander, G.J.: Investice. Praha: Victoria Publishing 1993. ISBN 80-85605-47-3.<br />

Sinkey, J. F.: Commercial Bank Financial Management. London: Prentice Hall 1998. ISBN 0-13-521048-8.<br />

Article history:<br />

Received: 7 January 2010<br />

Accepted: 7 March 2010


SCIENTIFIC RIEVIEW<br />

Future Stance of Currencies in the International<br />

Monetary System<br />

Kotlebova Jana * , Economic University in Bratislava, Faculty of National Economy,<br />

Department of Banking and International Finance, Slovak Republic<br />

UDC: 348.246; 339.743 JEL: F31; G15<br />

ABSTARCT – The current global crisis is a manifestation of global imbalance. Higher creation of<br />

savings in emerging economies compared to developed countries; higher investments of developed<br />

economies in comparison with developing countries; the current account deficit of the balance of<br />

payments in developed countries as opposed to the current account surplus of the balance of payments<br />

in emerging economies create new conditions for future stance of currencies in the international<br />

monetary system.<br />

The future aspect of the international monetary system is, at present, a major topic of discussion<br />

for monetary authorities as well as supranational institutions. The intention of this contribution is to<br />

highlight the main trends in its development<br />

KEY WORDS: global imbalance, savings, investment, foreign exchange reserves, balance of<br />

payment, importance of currencies for the international market, international monetary system<br />

Introduction<br />

We are in the fourth year of existence of the current global crisis, whereby the claim that<br />

it is in its final stage, is delivered with great prudence. According to the World Economic<br />

Outlook of the International Monetary Fund in October 2009 “after contracting by about 1 %<br />

in 2009, global activity is forecast to expand by about 3 percent in 2010, which is well below<br />

the rates achieved before the crisis”.<br />

Global imbalance<br />

The global economy has been transformed from the so-called bipolar world, where<br />

countries were explicitly divided into rich and poor, and global economic growth was<br />

determined by developments in the USA and Europe, into a world that can be described as<br />

multipolar, in which emerging and developing economies have been assigned a significant<br />

role from a global perspective. Menbere Tiruneh Workie (2007, 29)<br />

Since 2004 the global economy has vaulted to the current account surplus of the balance<br />

of payments thanks to developing countries. Developed economies demonstrate a current<br />

account deficit of the balance of payments. The graph outlines the IMF forecasts, which<br />

indicate the time at which the current account of the balance of payments in the aftermath of<br />

*<br />

Tel.: 00421 905 225 931, e-mail: jana.kotlebova@euba.sk


62<br />

Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 61-69)<br />

the global financial crisis should gradually decrease in the advanced economies, whereas<br />

further export growth is expected in emerging and developing economies.<br />

Graph 1. Development of the current account of balance of payments in major country groups<br />

( % of GDP)<br />

6<br />

5<br />

4<br />

% of GDP<br />

3<br />

2<br />

1<br />

0<br />

-1<br />

-2<br />

2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010<br />

Emerging and developing economies<br />

Advanced economies<br />

Source: author’s own processing, data from www.imf.org<br />

(2009 and 2010 – forecast of IMF)<br />

If we compare savings and investment in the major country groups of the world, we can<br />

notice, that investments in advanced economies are not covered by the creation of savings;<br />

on the contrary, in the case of emerging economies and developing economies savings<br />

exceed investments. The basic breakdown of countries into two groups can thus indicate the<br />

fact that investments in more developed parts of the world are created because of the savings<br />

of less developed parts of the world. If we look at the global data, we can notice that<br />

investments and savings stand almost on the same level, which could testify to the<br />

maintenance of global equilibrium; however, a detailed analysis of these data, according to<br />

other subgroups, can lead to interesting facts.<br />

The unambiguous conclusion of the analysis of the relationship between savings and<br />

investment is that the driving force of the current global economy is the savings in the<br />

developing world and the newly industrialized Asian economies. This tendency should be<br />

supported in the future by the fact that in these countries there is a strong population


Kotlebova, J., Future Stance of Currencies in the IMS, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No, 1-2, 61-69) 63<br />

growth, which creates space for the future growth of consumption and demand, which<br />

creates the prerequisites for their further economic growth.<br />

Graph 2. The development of savings and investments in developed and emerging economies<br />

as % of GDP<br />

40<br />

35<br />

% of GDP<br />

30<br />

25<br />

20<br />

15<br />

2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010<br />

Advanced Economies Investment<br />

Advanced Economies Gross National Savings<br />

Emerging and Developing Economies Investment<br />

Emerging and Developing Economis Gross National Savings<br />

Source: author’s own processing, data from www.imf.org<br />

(2009 and 2010 – forecast of IMF)<br />

Foreign Exchange Reserves<br />

Since 2005, it has been possible to monitor the higher creation of foreign exchange<br />

reserves in emerging and developing economies rather than in developed economies. The<br />

largest foreign exchange reserves (data to June 2008) are held by China (1.7 billion USD),<br />

Japan (0.97 billion U.S. dollars), Russia (0.55 billion USD).


64<br />

Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 61-69)<br />

Graph 3. Development of foreign exchange reserves in the world since 1995 to present<br />

8000000<br />

7000000<br />

6000000<br />

in millions of USD<br />

5000000<br />

4000000<br />

3000000<br />

2000000<br />

1000000<br />

0<br />

1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008<br />

Advanced Economies Emerging and Developing Economies Total Foreign Exchange Holdings<br />

Source: author’s own processing, data from www.imf.org<br />

Foreign exchange reserves are used to cover imports, foreign exchange interventions and<br />

balancing the movements in the capital and financial accounts of the balance of payments.<br />

As a result of more frequent financial crises in emerging economies, these incentives have<br />

been completed in order to protect the economy from the threat of loss of international<br />

liquidity (mainly due to a sudden outflow of capital). The main source of foreign exchange<br />

reserves in these countries is the net income from international trade and capital movements.<br />

Graph 4. Structure of global foreign exchange reserves from 2000 to present<br />

60<br />

50<br />

40<br />

%<br />

30<br />

20<br />

10<br />

0<br />

2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008<br />

USD GBP JPY CHF EUR other<br />

Source: author’s own processing, data from www.imf.org


Kotlebova, J., Future Stance of Currencies in the IMS, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No, 1-2, 61-69) 65<br />

After the launch of EMU, there has been a visible increase of the EUR in the foreign<br />

exchange portfolio and a drop in dollars. However, the U.S. dollar still continues to hold a<br />

strong position in the currency structure of the foreign exchange portfolio (about 65%).<br />

Importance of currencies for the international market<br />

When talking about international currencies, we are interested in the extent to which a<br />

certain currency is used outside the domestic economy (the place of its issuance). Some<br />

authors, for example, E. G. Lim, refer to it as a currency that is used ʺoutside the domestic<br />

economy by non-residents for transactions with residents of the domestic economy or with<br />

residents of third countriesʺ E. G. Lim (2006). Another approach attributes an international<br />

attribute to the currency based on its scope of usage as a currency of debt denomination<br />

issued by non-residents on the capital market.<br />

The European Central Bank assesses the international role of a particular currency based<br />

on the extent to which this currency is used as denomination for various financial assets and<br />

liabilities outside the area of its issuance, as a nominal anchor, reserve and intervention<br />

currency for central banks in certain third countries and as a parallel currency used by<br />

private agents in some geographically adjacent economies. At the same time, it assesses its<br />

importance as a currency (vehicle currency) in some segments of the global foreign exchange<br />

market. Therefore, it assesses two major aspects:<br />

a) the importance of the currency for the international bond market, foreign<br />

exchange market and the international market for goods and services,<br />

b) the importance of the currency for third countries.<br />

The largest issuers in the international bond market are the globally operating financial<br />

institutions and corporations. As foreign currency denomination, they mainly use USD, EUR<br />

or GBP. The international debt securities in USD are issued by European banks and<br />

corporations, whereas these securities in EUR are issued by investment banks and<br />

corporations from the United States, Great Britain and some European countries outside the<br />

euro area. The importance of the international bond market in total activities of the<br />

international global capital market has fallen due to the development of further financial<br />

markets that are open to foreign investors. Therefore, the international bond market is<br />

becoming a less significant indicator of a currency of international importance. Central banks<br />

in emerging economies and sovereign wealth funds have become large global investors, and<br />

have become increasingly active in the issuance of government bonds, corporate bonds and<br />

shares in third countries. The stock market has gained a considerable market share and<br />

therefore, it dictates the denomination of its own assets, and the international role of<br />

currencies.<br />

For example, Ch. Thimann (2009, 10) in his study argues that:<br />

a) the international bond market is excessively denominated in USD and EUR, and<br />

accounts for about 80% of the market, while on the dollar market segment EUR<br />

emissions account for 60%, on the EUR market the emissions from the USA and<br />

non-euro area countries account for 70% of emissions,


66<br />

Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 61-69)<br />

b) the international bond market is relatively narrowly structured, financial<br />

institutions constitute 80% of the market, businesses, governments or<br />

international institutions account for the rest 20%,<br />

c) the choice of currency has been significantly influenced by entrepreneurial<br />

motives (control of balance, project financing, taxes) and by short-term cyclical<br />

factors (exchange rate predictions and interest rate differential).<br />

The international bond market, from the perspective of the narrow supply of debt<br />

instruments, does not have such a significant impact on the evaluation of the currency<br />

position as on the international currency. In a broader definition of supply of debt<br />

instruments, however, its impact on the role of currency in an international context is more<br />

significant, according to the IMF data; up to 11.2 trillion USD bonds are held abroad out of<br />

the total volume of bonds (18.4 trillion U.S. dollars), whereas in the narrow definition, it is<br />

only 7.8 trillion USD. In comparison, foreign holdings of shares account for 8.8 trillion USD.<br />

Graph 5. Issuance of Bonds with variable rates of interest by Currency Denominations<br />

9000000<br />

8000000<br />

7000000<br />

6000000<br />

bil. USD<br />

5000000<br />

4000000<br />

3000000<br />

2000000<br />

1000000<br />

0<br />

Dec.2000<br />

Dec.2001<br />

Dec.2002<br />

Dec.2003<br />

Dec.2004<br />

Dec.2005<br />

Dec.2006<br />

Dec.2007<br />

Dec.2008<br />

Sep.2009<br />

US dollar Euro Yen Pound sterling<br />

Sw iss franc Canadian dollar Other currencies Floating rate total<br />

Source: author’s own processing, data from www.bis.org


Kotlebova, J., Future Stance of Currencies in the IMS, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No, 1-2, 61-69) 67<br />

Graph 6. Issuance of Bonds with fixed rates of interest by Currency Denominations<br />

18000000<br />

16000000<br />

14000000<br />

12000000<br />

bil. USD<br />

10000000<br />

8000000<br />

6000000<br />

4000000<br />

2000000<br />

0<br />

Dec.2000<br />

Dec.2001<br />

Dec.2002<br />

Dec.2003<br />

Dec.2004<br />

Dec.2005<br />

Dec.2006<br />

Dec.2007<br />

Dec.2008<br />

Sep.2009<br />

US dollar Euro Yen Pound sterling<br />

Swiss franc Canadian dollar Other currencies Straight fixed rate total<br />

Source: author’s own processing, data from www.bis.org<br />

The previous graphs can be used to monitor that the euro is used as a currency<br />

denomination of bonds to a much greater extent than the USD. This tendency in the world<br />

started to create the euro in 2002 (commercial papers and bonds with floating interest rates),<br />

in the case of other debt securities, two years later, in 2004. The biggest difference with the<br />

preference of the euro as denomination against the USD has been recorded in bonds with<br />

variable interest rate.<br />

A few years ago, there were concerns about a tripolar monetary system in which three<br />

currencies were to play a key role - USD, EUR and the Japanese yen. The current approach to<br />

the usage of currencies in the bond, foreign exchange and commodity markets in the world,<br />

however, suggests an entirely different trend.<br />

Graph 7. Development of the main pair USD/EUR<br />

1,7<br />

1,6<br />

1,5<br />

1,4<br />

1,3<br />

1,2<br />

1,1<br />

1<br />

0,9<br />

0,8<br />

I/99<br />

V/99<br />

IX/99<br />

I/00<br />

V/00<br />

IX/00<br />

I/01<br />

V/01<br />

IX/01<br />

I/02<br />

V/02<br />

IX/02<br />

I/03<br />

V/03<br />

IX/03<br />

I/04<br />

V/04<br />

IX/04<br />

I/05<br />

V/05<br />

IX/05<br />

I/06<br />

V/06<br />

IX/06<br />

I/07<br />

V/07<br />

IX/07<br />

I/08<br />

V/08<br />

IX/08<br />

I/09<br />

V/09<br />

IX/09<br />

Source: author’s own processing, data from www.ecb.int


68<br />

Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 61-69)<br />

If we were to comment upon the first question, then, for example, M. D. Chinn and J. A.<br />

Frankel(2008, 4) argue that the USD will lose its position as the main currency due to the fact<br />

that the EUR is a much more serious rival than the mark or yen used to be in the past, and<br />

the USA have already had a chronic current account deficit of the balance of payments for 25<br />

years and 35 years of USD depreciation. It is assumed that this will happen in 2015.<br />

Conclusion<br />

All the previously mentioned factors indicate the fact that the future development of the<br />

international monetary system will not continue in its conventional manner, but it will be<br />

fully affected by the approach of developed countries to developing world.<br />

On the question of the relationship between the USD and the euro there have been<br />

several discussions. Jean-Claude Trichet (President of the ECB) has said that the further<br />

depreciation of the USD is unacceptable for the euro area since it would mean the artificial<br />

overvaluation of the euro, whose exchange rate would not reflect the real economic<br />

development of the euro area, which would cause additional risks to maintain its stability in<br />

the future.<br />

Of course, it is necessary to take into account the further progress of economic integration<br />

in other regions of the world. For example, the countries of the Gulf in 2010 are planning to<br />

launch a monetary union with a common currency. At present, the composition of a common<br />

currency basket is being analysed. The risk is that these countries are major oil exporters, and<br />

they have already joined the trade in this commodity in a currency other than USD, which in<br />

the future could mean a further depreciation of USD.<br />

Similar integration schemes can also be observed in Africa and Asia, but their<br />

implementation is a matter of the distant future.<br />

As for the Chinese yuan, China is among the economies with the highest foreign<br />

exchange reserves, increasing exports and high savings creation. Moreover, in the past, they<br />

purchased large amounts of bonds denominated in USD, much of which is approaching<br />

maturity.<br />

Moreover, the recovery of the U.S. economy is not realised in such a pace as it was<br />

planned by an optimistic scenario.<br />

The G20 requested, for example, the European Commission to accelerate a further<br />

expansion of the euro area countries, which would protect their economies against the<br />

excessive volatility of exchange rates due to the financial crisis. The answer by the EC,<br />

however, to this proposal was unequivocal; the euro area would not abandon its<br />

enlargement strategy based on the fulfilment of the Maastricht criteria, since it considers<br />

price and financial stability as its main priority.<br />

Commenting upon the future outlook of the international monetary system there have<br />

been several discussions. Perhaps, the proposal of France and Great Britain on the creation of<br />

the Bretton Woods II system, which would again mean a return to the gold standard,<br />

whereas the main currency should be the IMFʹs special drawing rights (SDRs). Although this<br />

proposal is more or less criticized. Major opponents argue that the IMF membership (185<br />

countries) is very different today than it was at its birth, since emerging and developing<br />

countries are more represented than developed ones, while those given the growing debts


Kotlebova, J., Future Stance of Currencies in the IMS, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No, 1-2, 61-69) 69<br />

can be a threat to the restoration of international stability. Moreover, the Triffin paradox,<br />

which is well known for the BWS I failure, should be remembered. The increase in current<br />

account deficits of the balance of payments associated with the growth of public debt does<br />

not guarantee the basis for the international monetary system, which must meet the stability<br />

and other features such as liquidity and symmetry in international monetary relations.<br />

In regard to foreign trade in goods and services, the dominant currency denomination of<br />

transactions is still the American dollar, but here we can see a downward trend. Changes in<br />

the exchange rate alternate the value of mutual obligations and claims of the parties entering<br />

into business.<br />

The future international monetary system has to meet three basic functions - liquidity,<br />

symmetry and stability in the international monetary relations, which requires a unique<br />

management style. It is necessary to revisit the basic principles of the functioning of market<br />

mechanism in conditions of a globalizing economy, since the latest trends such as<br />

liberalization, both economic and financial integration point to the fact that the market is not<br />

always able to regulate shocks, to which the global economy is exposed.<br />

References<br />

Aizenman, J., Chin, M. D. and Ito, H. 2008. “Assessing the Emerging Global Financial Architecture:<br />

Measuring the Trilemma’s Configurations over Time.” NBER Working Paper 14533, Cambridge<br />

December 2008<br />

Chinn, M. D. and Frankel, J. A. “The Euro May over the Next 15 <strong>Year</strong>s Surpass the Dollar as Leading<br />

International Currency.” NBER Working Paper 13909 . Cambridge April 2008, p. 4<br />

Kotlebová, J. and Chovancová, B. “Medzinárodné finančné centrá (zmeny v globálnej finančnej<br />

architektúre).“ Bratislava: IURA Edition 2010<br />

Lim, E. G. “The Euro’s Challenge to the Dollar: Different Views from Economists and Evidence form<br />

COFER (Currency Composition of Foreign Exchange Reserves) and other Data.” IMF Working<br />

Paper No 06/153, Washington: IMF, June 2006<br />

Obstfeld, M., Shambaugh, J. C. and Taylor, A. M. “Financial stability, the Trilemma, and International<br />

Reserves.” NBER Working Paper 14217. August 2008<br />

Thimann, Ch. “Global Roles of Currencies.” ECB Working Paper No 1031, Frankfurt: ECB, March<br />

2009, p. 10<br />

Woodford, M. “Globalization and Monetary Control.” NBER Working Paper 13329, Cambridge<br />

Workie, M. T. “Dynamika svetovej ekonomiky v roku 2006 a perspektívy na roky 2007 a 2008:<br />

globálny pohľad.“ In: Vývoj a perspektívy svetovej ekonomiky – prínos informačných technológií a hrozby<br />

klimatických zmien. Workie, M. T. Bratislava: EÚ SAV 2007, ISBN 978-80-7144-159-5, p. 29<br />

Article history:<br />

Received: 6 January 2010<br />

Accepted: 19 March 2010


ORIGINAL SCIENTIFIC PAPER<br />

Differences Between Harmonized Indices of Consumer Prices<br />

and Consumer Price Indices in Selected Countries<br />

Milecová Zuzana * , Technical University of Košice, Faculty of Economics, Slovakia<br />

UDC: 338.51 JEL: C12, E31, E58<br />

ABSTRACT – The aim of the paper is to analyse the differences between the harmonized indices of<br />

consumer prices and the national consumer price indices on the theoretical as well as on the practical<br />

levels. We are dealing with defining the differences between the indices not only in the euro area and<br />

in V4-countries, but also in Serbia. The main differences are geographic and population coverage and<br />

owner-occupied housing. For statistical testing we have used a paired two sample t-test, which allows<br />

us to test the null hypothesis that the difference between the indices has a mean value of zero. Out of<br />

all 21 realised tests we reject null-hypothesis in 14 cases.<br />

KEY WORDS: harmonized index of consumer prices, consumer price index<br />

Introduction<br />

The Consumer Price Indices (CPIs) constitute one of the key macroeconomic indicators,<br />

play an important role in monetary policy and economic analysis, are typically referred to in<br />

wage negotiations and often used for indexing prices in contracts. However, the underlying<br />

concepts and methods differ across countries. That is the reason why the Harmonized<br />

Indices of Consumer Prices (HICPs) were constructed, they facilitate the carrying out of<br />

international comparisons. In addition, the HICP serves as one of the convergence criteria to<br />

assess whether a member state is ready to join the euro area. By means of HICP the<br />

European Central Bank (ECB) defines price stability as a year-on-year increase in the HICP<br />

for the euro area of below but close to 2% over the medium term. The HICP has found an<br />

important place in the economy and has replaced the CPIs in several areas.<br />

On the other hand, the measurement of inflation in two different ways is after all<br />

confusing for consumers. That is one of the reasons why the significant differences between<br />

indices were not desirable. An example is the price progress in the Slovak Republic in<br />

August 2008. Inflation measurement by the CPI rises from 2.2 to 2.4 per cent and the HICP<br />

showed the decrease from 1.1 to 0.7 per cent year on year. We can not clearly say which<br />

index is correct. Simplest would be to have only one price index, but both have their<br />

justification in the economy. That is the reason why it is important to discuss the differences<br />

between the HICPs and CPIs.<br />

In each country the differences between these two indices were analysed. According to<br />

the results we can say that the most important differences are consumption expenditure<br />

coverage and treatment of owner-occupied housing (OOH).<br />

*<br />

E-mail: Zuzana.Milecova@tuke.sk


Milecová, Z., Differences Between Harmonized Indices, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No, 1-2, 70-82) 71<br />

This paper deals with the differences between the HICPs and CPIs on both theoretical<br />

and practical levels. The aim is to analyse the differences between the used indices in the<br />

euro area and in V4-countries and also in Serbia. For statistical testing a paired two sample t-<br />

test was used. We tested the null hypothesis that the difference between the indices has a<br />

mean value of zero.<br />

Differences between indices in euro area<br />

Both HICPs and CPIs measure the changes in the prices over time of buying goods and<br />

services. The used calculation method is the same, Laspeyres chain index. The HICPs and<br />

CPIs are based on the same data sources, but they measure inflation with different concepts<br />

or methods. [9]<br />

In each member state analyses were realised to identify the differences between the<br />

national indices and the HICPs. For example in Netherlands the indices were compared by<br />

Leendert (2001), in Belgium by Druant (2001). The differences between the indices in Austria<br />

were analysed by Fluch and Rumler (2005). Ray Barrell, Simon Kirby and Rebecca Riley<br />

analysed the differences in UK and the results were published in the National Institute<br />

Economic Review in 2003. In the Slovak Republic Kosseyova and Doliak (2005) published the<br />

analysis of the differences. Ahnert and Branchi (2005) analysed the main differences in all<br />

European Union countries. Some information about the differences is available on the websides<br />

of individual statistical offices.<br />

With respect to these studies, the most important difference is the geographic and<br />

population coverage. The CPIs applying the residence concept reflect price changes in all<br />

goods and services purchased by consumers living in the country concerned, including their<br />

purchases abroad. By contrast, the domestic concept covers all consumption expenditure in<br />

the country concerned, regardless of who (residents or non-residents) purchased the goods<br />

and services. The HICPs apply the domestic concept. [7], [9] Decision about including the<br />

domestic concept is not random. ECB needs an index to monitor price changes in the<br />

territory of an individual member state, not in individual households. [8] On the other hand<br />

the choice of concept may have important impact on the differences between the indices in<br />

small countries like Luxemburg. We could find the differences between the indices in<br />

coverage of institutional household’s spending too. Most national indices follow only<br />

spending of private households. As an example we can mention Estonia, Latvia, Slovenia,<br />

Sweden, Belgium, Luxemburg and Portugal. [1]<br />

The differences are also in the number and coverage of items in goods and services<br />

basket, especially in subsidized areas, such as in health, social protection, education and<br />

insurance services. [8], [9] For example in France are healthy services excluded from the CPI.<br />

The Netherlands’s national price index follows some costs paid within healthy care and<br />

includes membership fees in sport and social clubs. The national index in Sweden includes<br />

some items of social protection. Games of chance are excluded from the CPI index for<br />

example in Italy and in Germany. The national index in Germany includes lottery tax and<br />

motor vehicle tax. [1]<br />

But the most important factor affecting the international comparability between the CPIs<br />

is the treatment of OOH. Sixteen of twenty seven European Union countries exclude OOH


72<br />

Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 70-82)<br />

by calculating the CPIs. [7] OOH is included in the CPI for example in Denmark, Sweden,<br />

Germany, Ireland, Netherlands, Austria and Finland, but this countries use different<br />

approaches to cover OOH. In the HICP is OOH still excluded, because it has not yet been<br />

decided how owner-occupied housing should be covered. [1]<br />

The differences are formed by rounding the indices on individual aggregation levels too.<br />

[9] Some national statistical institutes use different aggregation formulas in their national<br />

CPI and HICP for aggregation at the lowest levels of the index. [7] The consumption basket<br />

and the expenditure shares of the items covered in the national CPIs and the HICPs may be<br />

updated at different intervals. [7] France, Italy, Luxemburg, Portugal, Estonia, Latvia,<br />

Lithuania, Slovenia, Sweden and UK update weights in consumer basket for calculating the<br />

national CPIs annually. The other member states review basket weights mostly every five<br />

years. Updates interval in Greece is as late as six years. [1] Different update interval leads to<br />

the fact that there are many new goods and services which are in basket of the HICP, but the<br />

CPI does not cover them yet. For example organic food, air tickets, mobile phones and<br />

computers, were covered in the HICP sooner than in the CPI in Belgium. [6] The methods<br />

used to estimate prices for goods when their quality is changing over time are differ across<br />

countries. The differences are in coverage of price reductions during winter and summer<br />

sales periods. There may be also differences between the national classifications used for the<br />

CPI and the harmonized classification of the HICP. [8]<br />

The progress of the HICPs and the CPIs is shown in Picture 1 in the annex.<br />

Table 1 Differences Between Indices in Euro Area<br />

Belgium<br />

Germany<br />

Ireland<br />

Greece<br />

Spain<br />

France<br />

Italy<br />

Luxembourg<br />

Malta<br />

Netherlands<br />

Austria<br />

mean variance p-value<br />

HICP 1.97 1.53<br />

CPI 1.97 1.52<br />

1.000000<br />

HICP 1.49 0.70<br />

CPI 1.46 0.57<br />

0.168871<br />

HICP 2.91 2.80<br />

CPI 3.10 6.35<br />

0.069507<br />

HICP 3.26 0.95<br />

CPI 3.25 0.94<br />

0.844333<br />

HICP 2.84 1.51<br />

CPI 2.89 1.52<br />

0.041505<br />

HICP 1.68 0.83<br />

CPI 1.55 0.70<br />

7.38E-23<br />

HICP 2.26 0.47<br />

CPI 2.21 0.46<br />

0.022933<br />

HICP 2.48 2.19<br />

CPI 2.09 1.08<br />

1.83E-11<br />

HICP 2.64 1.56<br />

CPI 2.44 1.67<br />

0.003881<br />

HICP 2.24 1.40<br />

CPI 2.14 0.83<br />

0.00124<br />

HICP 1.70 0.77<br />

CPI 1.80 0.85<br />

9.75E-06


Milecová, Z., Differences Between Harmonized Indices, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No, 1-2, 70-82) 73<br />

Portugal<br />

Slovenia<br />

Slovakia<br />

Cyprus<br />

Finland<br />

HICP 2.58 1.69<br />

CPI 2.64 1.55<br />

HICP 5.34 7.20<br />

CPI 5.31 7.15<br />

HICP 5.90 13.76<br />

CPI 6.11 12.51<br />

HICP 2.51 2.42<br />

CPI 2.65 2.01<br />

HICP 1.75 1.12<br />

CPI 1.72 1.62<br />

Sources: Eurostat, national data, own calculations<br />

0.001239<br />

0.008323<br />

9.46E-10<br />

0.000706<br />

0.513191<br />

For statistical testing of the differences between the indices we used a paired two sample<br />

t-test. We have assumed normal distribution, which was verified by visual methods. We<br />

tested the null hypothesis that the difference between the indices has a mean value of zero on<br />

significance level 5%. If the p-value is less than 0.05, we reject the null hypothesis and if the<br />

p-value is more than 0.05, we cannot reject the null hypothesis. The results of this analysis<br />

are in Table 1.<br />

We tested data from January 1998 to October 2009 for all sixteen countries, which<br />

gradually accessed the euro area (142 observations). In just five cases we could not reject the<br />

null hypothesis (Belgium, Germany, Ireland, Greece and Finland). According to this analysis,<br />

we could not clearly say that there are no significant differences between the national CPIs<br />

and the HICPs in the euro area.<br />

Ahnert and Branchi (2005) analysed the differences between the HICPs and the<br />

individual CPIs. The aim of their research was to prove that the differences are not<br />

significant and there is a decreasing trend. To confirm this hypothesis, authors draw up an<br />

index as simple weighted average of the CPIs of the euro area member states. The country weights are<br />

equal to the countries share of Household Final Monetary Consumption Expenditure<br />

(HFMCE) in total. This index was compared with the official Monetary Union Index of<br />

Consumer Prices (MUICP), which is configured by Eurostat of the HICPs of the member states<br />

participating in the EMU. [1] This analysis inspired us to repeat calculations of current<br />

information and review present situation.<br />

Von der Lippe (2001) states the compiation method of the MUICP index as follows [17]:<br />

k<br />

k<br />

= ⎛ ⎞ ⎛ ⎞ ⎛ ⎞<br />

⎜ ⎟ ⋅⎜<br />

⎟ ⋅ ⋅⎜<br />

∑<br />

k<br />

M<br />

0 t ∑cm1H<br />

m1<br />

∑cm2H<br />

m2<br />

... cmt<br />

H<br />

mt<br />

⎟ . (1),<br />

⎝ m=<br />

1 ⎠ ⎝ m=<br />

1 ⎠ ⎝ m=<br />

1 ⎠<br />

where M stands for the MUICP, H for the individual HICPs, cm represents the country<br />

weights, k the individual member states (m = 1, ..., k) and t is for the time. Hmt is then the link<br />

(from t-1 to t) for country m. Formula (1) represents time series of the MUICP, which could<br />

by written as follows:<br />

M<br />

0 t<br />

= M<br />

1<br />

⋅ M<br />

2<br />

⋅...<br />

⋅ M t<br />

. (2),<br />

Greece accessed the euro area in the year 2001 and the MUICP index has been extended,<br />

as shown in Formula (3):


74<br />

Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 70-82)<br />

k<br />

⎛ *<br />

⎞<br />

M<br />

0,<br />

t+ 1<br />

= M<br />

0t<br />

⋅⎜∑cm,<br />

t+<br />

1H<br />

m,<br />

t+<br />

1<br />

+ ck<br />

+ 1, t+<br />

1H<br />

k + 1, t+<br />

1<br />

⎟ . (3),<br />

⎝ m=<br />

1<br />

⎠<br />

M<br />

0 , t+ 1<br />

= M<br />

1<br />

⋅ M<br />

2<br />

⋅... ⋅ M<br />

t+<br />

1<br />

. (4),<br />

where t+1 states for the year 2001. Star marks out the new country weights system after<br />

access of a new member state. The MUICP has been extended progressively with access of<br />

individual member states to the euro area. The index includes sixteen countries till today.<br />

Necessary data are published by individual national statistical offices, OECD and<br />

Eurostat. We found the differences of up to 1.3 percentage points between data published by<br />

OECD and individual statistical offices. The same data are published only for Germany,<br />

France and Italy. For our model we used data published by statistical offices of member<br />

states, because they are revised. The country weights used in individual years are published<br />

on the web-side of Eurostat.<br />

Figure 2. MUICP versus Aggregated CPIs<br />

Sources: Eurostat, national data, own calculations<br />

The result of calculations is shown in Figure 2. We can confirm that the differences<br />

between the MUICP and the index composed from the CPIs have been diminishing over<br />

time. On the other hand, we tried to use the statistical test, to identify if the difference<br />

between the indices is significant or not.<br />

Table 2. Differences between MUICP and Aggregated CPIs<br />

Euro Area<br />

mean variance p-value<br />

MUICP 1.96 0.67<br />

0.000184<br />

Aggregated CPIs 1.92 0.63<br />

Sources: [1], Eurostat, national data, own calculations


Milecová, Z., Differences Between Harmonized Indices, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No, 1-2, 70-82) 75<br />

For statistical testing we used a paired sample t-test as in the previous case. We analysed<br />

data from January 1998 to October 2009. Considering the fact that the p-value of analysed<br />

data is less than 0.05, we decided to reject null-hypothesis that the difference between the<br />

indices has a mean value of zero.<br />

Differences between Indices in V4-Countries<br />

The differences between the HICPs and the national CPIs in V4-countries are collected by<br />

Eurostat and the statistical offices of the individual countries.<br />

The Hungarian national CPI includes approximately 900 items, which are observed in 35-<br />

150 outlets depending on their character. Altogether more than seventy-five thousand prices<br />

are collected monthly. [11] The main differences between the indices in Hungary concern the<br />

coverage of owner-occupied housing and games of chance which are excluded from the<br />

HICP and the expenditure of foreign visitors which are excluded from the national CPI. The<br />

national CPI does not monitor development of expenditure of institutional households. The<br />

weights are updated in Hungary every year, but weights for the HICP are updated every 5<br />

years, only if required, review is made annually. [10], [11]<br />

The number of price representatives in consumer basket for the CPI calculation in the<br />

Czech Republic (CR) is 729. Consumer prices are surveyed in 35 selected districts in the CR<br />

and in the Capital of Prague. Consumer basket represents approximately 55,000 prices to be<br />

surveyed monthly. [4], [13] Regarding the differences between the HICP and the national<br />

CPI in the Czech Republic, consumption expenditure of non-residents in the economic<br />

territory of the country is included in the HICP, but excluded from the national CPI.<br />

Institutional households are excluded from the CPI, unlike from the HICP. Expenditure of<br />

investments in the owner-occupied houses (major repairs) is included in the national CPI,<br />

but excluded from the HICP. The purchase of the house itself is excluded from both indices.<br />

[10]<br />

In Poland there were about 1,800 representative consumer goods and services chosen for<br />

completing the CPI in 2009. On average, there are about 292 thousand prices collected each<br />

month in 209 price survey regions. [3] Regarding the differences between the HICP and the<br />

national consumer price index in Poland, institutional households and consumption<br />

expenditure of non-residents in the economic territory of the country are included in the<br />

HICP, but excluded from the national CPI. Games of chance are included in the national CPI,<br />

but excluded from the HICP. Another contributory factor to the differences between the<br />

HICP and the national consumer price index concerns the use of different weights. The CPI<br />

is calculated with the use of weights from the Household Budget Survey for the previous<br />

year, while the HICP utilizes weights from the National Accounts. Owner-occupied housing<br />

is excluded from the HICP and from the CPI, too. Weights for the CPI are reviewed annually.<br />

[10]<br />

The Slovak CPI covers approximately 90 % of all households and the calculation is based<br />

on consumer basket with 709 representative items. Prices of goods and services are collected<br />

in about 13,400 outlets and business premises. Number of price quotations is about 90,000.<br />

[16] The main difference between the HICP and the national CPI in the Slovak Republic<br />

concerns the coverage of owner-occupied housing, in particular imputed rents and


76<br />

Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 70-82)<br />

expenditure on major maintenance and repair which are excluded from the HICP. The<br />

weights for the CPI are reviewed annually. [10]<br />

The progress of the HICPs and the national CPIs in V4-countries is shown in Figure 3.<br />

Figure 3. Progress of CPIs and HICPs in V4 countries<br />

20,0<br />

18,0<br />

16,0<br />

14,0<br />

12,0<br />

10,0<br />

8,0<br />

6,0<br />

4,0<br />

2,0<br />

0,0<br />

1998M01<br />

1998M12<br />

16,0<br />

14,0<br />

12,0<br />

10,0<br />

8,0<br />

6,0<br />

4,0<br />

2,0<br />

0,0<br />

1998M01<br />

1998M12<br />

Hungary<br />

1999M11<br />

2000M10<br />

2001M09<br />

2002M08<br />

2003M07<br />

Poland<br />

1999M11<br />

2000M10<br />

2001M09<br />

2002M08<br />

2003M07<br />

2004M06<br />

2005M05<br />

CPI<br />

HICP<br />

2004M06<br />

2005M05<br />

2006M04<br />

2007M03<br />

2008M02<br />

2009M01<br />

CPI<br />

HICP<br />

2006M04<br />

2007M03<br />

2008M02<br />

2009M01<br />

16,0<br />

14,0<br />

12,0<br />

10,0<br />

8,0<br />

6,0<br />

4,0<br />

2,0<br />

0,0<br />

-2,0<br />

1998M01<br />

1998M12<br />

18,0<br />

16,0<br />

14,0<br />

12,0<br />

10,0<br />

8,0<br />

6,0<br />

4,0<br />

2,0<br />

0,0<br />

-2,0<br />

1998M01<br />

1998M12<br />

Czech Republic<br />

1999M11<br />

2000M10<br />

2001M09<br />

2002M08<br />

2003M07<br />

Sources: Eurostat and individual statistical offices<br />

Slovakia<br />

CPI<br />

HICP<br />

2004M06<br />

2005M05<br />

2006M04<br />

2007M03<br />

2008M02<br />

2009M01<br />

CPI<br />

HICP<br />

1999M11<br />

2000M10<br />

2001M09<br />

2002M08<br />

2003M07<br />

2004M06<br />

2005M05<br />

2006M04<br />

2007M03<br />

2008M02<br />

2009M01<br />

The introduction of the HICP is an advantage in terms of convergence criteria and<br />

monetary policy, especially in the Slovak Republic. The inflation measured by method of the<br />

HICP is less than inflation measured by method of the CPI. The reason for this progress is<br />

that the CPI includes the OOH, which significantly increased in last months. The OOH was<br />

recently monitored only as monthly payments for repairs and maintenance of owner<br />

occupied apartments calculated per an apartment’s square meter floor (regular payments to<br />

so-called repairs fund). The government decided to support insulating homes by interest-free<br />

loans within anti-crisis measures. Residents began to use them massively. This has led to the<br />

increase of payments to repair fund. Significant increase of the CPI and its deviation in the<br />

HICP is not due to inflation, but due to numerous projects of insulating homes. This progress<br />

forced statistical office to change the method to calculate the OOH. The repair fund is only<br />

60% of the OOH today, the other 40% are other items related to housing. Data of the CPI<br />

were revised retroactively from January 2009. [12]<br />

For statistical testing we used also a paired two sample t-test, as in the previous cases.


Milecová, Z., Differences Between Harmonized Indices, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No, 1-2, 70-82) 77<br />

Table 3. Differences Between Indices in V4-Countries<br />

mean variance p-value<br />

Hungary<br />

HICP 7.16 11.13<br />

CPI 7.17 10.89<br />

0.844968<br />

Poland<br />

HICP 4.59 12.49<br />

CPI 4.54 12.74<br />

0.030217<br />

Czech Republic<br />

HICP 3.16 7.97<br />

CPI 3.44 8.61<br />

8.38E-21<br />

Sources: Eurostat, national data, own calculations<br />

We tested data from January 1998 to October 2009 for V4-countries (the analysis of<br />

Slovakia is in Table 1). In just one case we could not reject the null hypothesis (Hungary). In<br />

the other three cases we reject the null hypothesis, that the difference between the indices has<br />

a mean value of zero. According to this analysis, we could not clearly say that there are no<br />

significant differences between the national CPIs and the HICPs in V4-countries.<br />

Consumer price indices in the Republic of Serbia<br />

In the Republic of Serbia two retail price indices were used on national level until January<br />

2003. The first, the Retail Price Index (RPI) is used as national inflation measure and deflator<br />

of output and assets. Retail prices are the prices that retail outlets, individual agricultural<br />

producers and service providers apply in selling their products and services to end users,<br />

including the turnover tax. The second, the Consumer Price Index, is a type of cost of living<br />

index and is used for wages, pensions and other social benefits revaluation. The weights for<br />

the RPI are based on structure of retail turnover of goods and services. The weights for the<br />

CPI were calculated from structure of household consumption. [5] The national CPI in Serbia<br />

has different classification from COICOP and follows seven sub-categories of goods and<br />

services. Food; Tobacco and beverages; Clothes and footwear; Housing and household<br />

operations; Hygiene and health care; Education, culture and entertainment; Vehicles and<br />

services. [7] Serbian national statistical office started to calculate the CPI by COICOP in<br />

January 2007. [5] This index presents a special retail prices index that is being calculated<br />

according to the methodology that is harmonized with recommendations for retail prices<br />

index calculation in the European Union. CPI-COICOP is comparable with the HICP of the<br />

European Union. [15]<br />

Statistical office of the Republic of Serbia has published monthly series of indices on the<br />

web-side from January 2000 till now. For better demonstrations of the differences between<br />

the mentioned indices, we decided to construct Figure 4 from shorter time series (from<br />

January 2003 to October 2009).


78<br />

Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 70-82)<br />

Figure 4. Progresses of CPI, CPI-COICOP and RPI in the Republic of Serbia (y-o-y)<br />

20<br />

18<br />

16<br />

14<br />

12<br />

10<br />

8<br />

6<br />

4<br />

2<br />

0<br />

0103<br />

0603<br />

1103<br />

0404<br />

0904<br />

0205<br />

CPI-COICOP<br />

CPI<br />

RPI<br />

0705<br />

1205<br />

0506<br />

1006<br />

0307<br />

0807<br />

0108<br />

0608<br />

1108<br />

0409<br />

0909<br />

Sources: Statistical office of the Republic of Serbia<br />

The main difference between the CPI-COICOP and the Index of Retail Prices is coverage,<br />

because the list of products and services also includes rent, financial services, educational<br />

services as well as catering trade services. The indices use different weight systems and<br />

classification by calculating. Also the formula for the index calculation at the lowest level of<br />

aggregating is different for the CPI-COICOP and for the RPI too. [15]<br />

Table 4. Differences Between RPI and CPI-COICOP<br />

The Republic of Serbia<br />

mean variance p-value<br />

RPI 8.89 5.19<br />

0.894883<br />

CPI-COICOP 8.93 11.97<br />

Sources: Statistical office of the Republic of Serbia, own calculations<br />

For statistical testing we have used a paired sample t-test as in the previous cases. We<br />

tested data from January 2007, when the CPI-COICOP was introduced in to the practice to<br />

the present (October 2009). Considering that the p-value of analysed data is more than 0.05,<br />

we cannot reject null-hypothesis that the difference between the indices has a mean value of<br />

zero. We could test only the 35 observations this time.<br />

The RPI was the official measure of inflation in Serbia for a long time, but from the start<br />

of 2009 the CPI became the main inflation indicator, which is targeted by the National Bank<br />

of Serbia. Their aim is to have measurements for inflation comparable with EU. [14]<br />

Time series of the HICP for Serbia are not available so far.<br />

Conclusion<br />

The harmonized index of consumer prices replaced the national consumer price index in<br />

several areas. The harmonized index is used as one of the convergence criteria, which


Milecová, Z., Differences Between Harmonized Indices, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No, 1-2, 70-82) 79<br />

assesses the readiness of a member state to join the euro area. European central bank defines<br />

price stability through the harmonized index of consumer prices. But in economy there are<br />

differences between the indices. The main differences are geographic and population<br />

coverage and owner-occupied housing.<br />

For statistical testing we used a paired sample t-test, which allows testing if the difference<br />

between the indices has a mean value of zero. We tested data from January 1998 to October<br />

2009 from all euro area member states and V4-countries. From 19 realised tests in the<br />

countries of the European Union, we cannot reject the null-hypothesis in only six cases<br />

(Belgium, Germany, Greece, Ireland, Finland and Hungary). In the other cases we had nullhypothesis<br />

rejected on a significance level of 5 per cent. Considering the realised analysis we<br />

could not clearly say that the differences between the indices are not significant.<br />

In the next step we have drawn up an aggregated CPI index. This analysis confirmed that<br />

the differences between the indices have been diminishing over time. On the other hand, the<br />

statistical test did not confirm the null-hypothesis.<br />

In the Republic of Serbia three retail price indices are followed; the Retail Price Index, the<br />

Consumer Price Index by national structure and the Consumer Price Index by COICOP.<br />

While the National Bank of Serbia used the Retail price index as the main indicator until<br />

December 2008, from the start of 2009 it is targeting the CPI-COICOP. Considering the<br />

statistical analysis we cannot reject the null-hypothesis that the difference between the<br />

indices has a mean value of zero.<br />

References<br />

[1] AHNERT, H., BRANCHI, M. The HICP as an anchor for European consumer price statistics<br />

[online]. 2005 [cit. 2009-12-21] available on the Internet:<br />

.<br />

[2] ASTIN, J. The European Union Harmonized indices of consumer prices (HICP) [online]. 1999<br />

[cit. 2010-01-16] available on the Internet:<br />

.<br />

[3] Central statistical office of Poland Consumer Price Index [online] 2009 [cit. 2010-01-15]<br />

available on the Internet:<br />

.<br />

[4] Czech Statistical office Consumer Price Indices - User’s methodological manual [online]. 2010<br />

[cit. 2010-01-06] available on the Internet: .<br />

[5] JANKOVIC, M. Price collection in unstable market conditions [online]. 2006 [cit. 2010-01-17]<br />

available on the Internet:<br />

.<br />

[6] DRUANT, M. Belgian HICP: A Major Step Forward in the accurate measurement of inflation<br />

[online]. 2002 [cit. 2010-01-16] available on the Internet: .<br />

ISSN 1725-1338.<br />

[7] ECB Understanding price developments and consumer price indices in South-Eastern Europe<br />

[online]. 2007 [cit. 2010-01-16] available on the Internet:<br />

. ISSN 1725-6534.


80<br />

Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 70-82)<br />

[8] Eurostat HICP-CPI Differences [online]. [cit. 2009-12-21] available on the Internet:<br />

.<br />

[9] Eurostat Harmonized indices of consumer prices (HICPs): A short Guide for Users [online].<br />

2004 [cit. 2009-12-21] available on the Internet:<br />

.<br />

[10] Eurostat Information Note on the Harmonized Indices of Consumer Prices, Compliance<br />

Monitoring [online]. 2008, 2009 [cit. 2010-01-12] available on the Internet:<br />


Anex 1<br />

Picture 1. Progress of Harmonized Indices of Consumer Prices and National Consumer Price Indices in Euro Zone Member States<br />

Belgium<br />

-4<br />

-2<br />

0<br />

2<br />

4<br />

6<br />

8<br />

1998M01<br />

1998M10<br />

1999M07<br />

2000M04<br />

2001M01<br />

2001M10<br />

2002M07<br />

2003M04<br />

2004M01<br />

2004M10<br />

2005M07<br />

2006M04<br />

2007M01<br />

2007M10<br />

2008M07<br />

2009M04<br />

CPI<br />

HICP<br />

Germany<br />

-1,0<br />

0,0<br />

1,0<br />

2,0<br />

3,0<br />

4,0<br />

1998M01<br />

1998M12<br />

1999M11<br />

2000M10<br />

2001M09<br />

2002M08<br />

2003M07<br />

2004M06<br />

2005M05<br />

2006M04<br />

2007M03<br />

2008M02<br />

2009M01<br />

CPI<br />

HICP<br />

Ireland<br />

-8,0<br />

-6,0<br />

-4,0<br />

-2,0<br />

0,0<br />

2,0<br />

4,0<br />

6,0<br />

8,0<br />

1998M01<br />

1998M12<br />

1999M11<br />

2000M10<br />

2001M09<br />

2002M08<br />

2003M07<br />

2004M06<br />

2005M05<br />

2006M04<br />

2007M03<br />

2008M02<br />

2009M01<br />

CPI<br />

HICP<br />

Greece<br />

0,0<br />

1,0<br />

2,0<br />

3,0<br />

4,0<br />

5,0<br />

6,0<br />

1998M01<br />

1998M12<br />

1999M11<br />

2000M10<br />

2001M09<br />

2002M08<br />

2003M07<br />

2004M06<br />

2005M05<br />

2006M04<br />

2007M03<br />

2008M02<br />

2009M01<br />

CPI<br />

HICP<br />

Spain<br />

-2,0<br />

-1,0<br />

0,0<br />

1,0<br />

2,0<br />

3,0<br />

4,0<br />

5,0<br />

6,0<br />

1998M01<br />

1998M12<br />

1999M11<br />

2000M10<br />

2001M09<br />

2002M08<br />

2003M07<br />

2004M06<br />

2005M05<br />

2006M04<br />

2007M03<br />

2008M02<br />

2009M01<br />

CPI<br />

HICP<br />

France<br />

-2,0<br />

-1,0<br />

0,0<br />

1,0<br />

2,0<br />

3,0<br />

4,0<br />

5,0<br />

1998M01<br />

1998M12<br />

1999M11<br />

2000M10<br />

2001M09<br />

2002M08<br />

2003M07<br />

2004M06<br />

2005M05<br />

2006M04<br />

2007M03<br />

2008M02<br />

2009M01<br />

CPI<br />

HICP<br />

Italy<br />

-1,0<br />

0,0<br />

1,0<br />

2,0<br />

3,0<br />

4,0<br />

5,0<br />

1998M01<br />

1998M12<br />

1999M11<br />

2000M10<br />

2001M09<br />

2002M08<br />

2003M07<br />

2004M06<br />

2005M05<br />

2006M04<br />

2007M03<br />

2008M02<br />

2009M01<br />

CPI<br />

HICP<br />

Cyprus<br />

-2,0<br />

-1,0<br />

0,0<br />

1,0<br />

2,0<br />

3,0<br />

4,0<br />

5,0<br />

6,0<br />

7,0<br />

1998M01<br />

1998M12<br />

1999M11<br />

2000M10<br />

2001M09<br />

2002M08<br />

2003M07<br />

2004M06<br />

2005M05<br />

2006M04<br />

2007M03<br />

2008M02<br />

2009M01<br />

CPI<br />

HICP<br />

Luxemburg<br />

-2,0<br />

-1,0<br />

0,0<br />

1,0<br />

2,0<br />

3,0<br />

4,0<br />

5,0<br />

6,0<br />

7,0<br />

1998M01<br />

1998M12<br />

1999M11<br />

2000M10<br />

2001M09<br />

2002M08<br />

2003M07<br />

2004M06<br />

2005M05<br />

2006M04<br />

2007M03<br />

2008M02<br />

2009M01<br />

CPI<br />

HICP<br />

Malta<br />

-2,0<br />

-1,0<br />

0,0<br />

1,0<br />

2,0<br />

3,0<br />

4,0<br />

5,0<br />

6,0<br />

7,0<br />

1998M01<br />

1998M12<br />

1999M11<br />

2000M10<br />

2001M09<br />

2002M08<br />

2003M07<br />

2004M06<br />

2005M05<br />

2006M04<br />

2007M03<br />

2008M02<br />

2009M01<br />

CPI<br />

HICP<br />

Netherlands<br />

-1,0<br />

0,0<br />

1,0<br />

2,0<br />

3,0<br />

4,0<br />

5,0<br />

6,0<br />

1998M01<br />

1998M12<br />

1999M11<br />

2000M10<br />

2001M09<br />

2002M08<br />

2003M07<br />

2004M06<br />

2005M05<br />

2006M04<br />

2007M03<br />

2008M02<br />

2009M01<br />

CPI<br />

HICP<br />

Austria<br />

-1,0<br />

0,0<br />

1,0<br />

2,0<br />

3,0<br />

4,0<br />

5,0<br />

1998M01<br />

1998M12<br />

1999M11<br />

2000M10<br />

2001M09<br />

2002M08<br />

2003M07<br />

2004M06<br />

2005M05<br />

2006M04<br />

2007M03<br />

2008M02<br />

2009M01<br />

CPI<br />

HICP


Portugal<br />

-3,0<br />

-2,0<br />

-1,0<br />

0,0<br />

1,0<br />

2,0<br />

3,0<br />

4,0<br />

5,0<br />

6,0<br />

1998M01<br />

1998M12<br />

1999M11<br />

2000M10<br />

2001M09<br />

2002M08<br />

2003M07<br />

2004M06<br />

2005M05<br />

2006M04<br />

2007M03<br />

2008M02<br />

2009M01<br />

CPI<br />

HICP<br />

Slovenia<br />

-2,0<br />

0,0<br />

2,0<br />

4,0<br />

6,0<br />

8,0<br />

10,0<br />

12,0<br />

1998M01<br />

1998M12<br />

1999M11<br />

2000M10<br />

2001M09<br />

2002M08<br />

2003M07<br />

2004M06<br />

2005M05<br />

2006M04<br />

2007M03<br />

2008M02<br />

2009M01<br />

CPI<br />

HICP<br />

Slovakia<br />

-2,0<br />

0,0<br />

2,0<br />

4,0<br />

6,0<br />

8,0<br />

10,0<br />

12,0<br />

14,0<br />

16,0<br />

18,0<br />

1998M01<br />

1998M12<br />

1999M11<br />

2000M10<br />

2001M09<br />

2002M08<br />

2003M07<br />

2004M06<br />

2005M05<br />

2006M04<br />

2007M03<br />

2008M02<br />

2009M01<br />

CPI<br />

HICP<br />

Finland<br />

-2,0<br />

-1,0<br />

0,0<br />

1,0<br />

2,0<br />

3,0<br />

4,0<br />

5,0<br />

6,0<br />

1998M01<br />

1998M12<br />

1999M11<br />

2000M10<br />

2001M09<br />

2002M08<br />

2003M07<br />

2004M06<br />

2005M05<br />

2006M04<br />

2007M03<br />

2008M02<br />

2009M01<br />

CPI<br />

HICP<br />

Source: Eurostat and individual statistical offices


ORIGINAL SCIENTIFIC PAPER<br />

Do Minimum Wage Changes Influence Employment?<br />

Vokorokosová Renatá * , Technical University of Košice, Faculty of Economics,<br />

Department for Banking and Investment, Slovakia<br />

UDC: 331.526 JEL: J31; J24<br />

ABSTRACT – Greater number of foreign working studies does confirm the theoretical assumption<br />

that minimum wage increases negatively change the amount of employed people. Contrary to these,<br />

there is, however, a completely different persuasion on this issue among some economists. This article<br />

picks out minimum wage as an important part of employment research investigating two files; the<br />

number of working people aged 15 – 64 and all working labours.<br />

KEY WORDS: working force, minimum wage, ageing index, labour productivity<br />

Introduction<br />

Although there are several factors (like economic growth, foreign investments, education<br />

of workers, average wage, living wage 1 ), effecting the number of employed persons,<br />

discussions are, however, held at the most about the relation between minimum wage 2 and<br />

employment just on when setting in new level of minimum wage. Among majority of<br />

employment and minimum wage empirical literature 3 (e g. Brown, Gilroy and Kohen 1981;<br />

Neumark and Wascher 1992; Card and Krueger 1994; Welch 1976; OECD 1998; Eriksson and<br />

Pytlikova 2004) there are papers testing the relationship between minimum wage and<br />

employment of teens and young generation, skilled workers (e. g. Brown, Gilroy and Kohen<br />

1983; Ragan 1977).<br />

Test results for minimum wage influences upon employment rest on existing theoretical<br />

models. There is a basic competitive model (neoclassical theory accepts that employment<br />

declines when minimum wage rises; if the level of minimum wage exceeds the market<br />

clearing wage, supply of labours increases while demand declines), followed by alternative –<br />

modified specifications. The basic competitive model posits a labour market with many<br />

identical companies and homogeneous workers (Zavodny 1998). It rests on the behaviour of<br />

a labour force so that the additional unit of labour takes the work only if wages are<br />

enhanced. Thus the value of the last unit of labour (marginal product) declines as labour<br />

increases. However, this approach (model) does not consider any differences as to ability,<br />

experience or knowledge of labour forces (Samson 2008).<br />

*<br />

Address: Nemcovej 32, 040 01 Košice, Slovakia, e-mail: Renata.Vokorokosova@tuke.sk<br />

1<br />

Living wage: a wage which is enough to buy the necessary things in daily life (Longman Dictionary,<br />

1978).<br />

2<br />

Minimum wage: the lowest wage permitted by law, by a rule, or by agreement, for certain work<br />

(Longman Dictionary 1978).<br />

3<br />

In Slovakia there is a need of empirical research papers devoted to minimum wage and employment.<br />

For more information see e. g. Vokorokosová 2008; Barošová 2008; Eriksson and Pytlikova 2004.


84<br />

Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 83-90)<br />

On the contrary, alternative or sometimes called dynamic models 4 (e.g. substitution<br />

model of labour force) focused on two types of labours: skilled and no skilled and compare<br />

the level of minimum wage with that of a market clearing wage 5 . Skilled and unskilled<br />

workers if being employed, one can suppose, that minimum wage changes increase the<br />

number of skilled workers employed while decrease the number of unskilled workers in the<br />

working process. Monopsony model – another alternative model denotes a single employer<br />

that, if requiring additional unit of labour has to increase the wage levels of all his workers.<br />

The aim of this paper is to examine the impact of minimum wage changes upon the<br />

employment status of employed people regardless the age as well as of that aged 15 – 64. The<br />

paper proceeds as follows: section two provides a brief history of minimum wage relating to<br />

Slovakian legal environment. Section three puts details to empirical arrangement and the<br />

outcomes. Section four concludes.<br />

History of minimum wage<br />

Minimum wage was for the first time approved in New Zeeland (1896) later in Australia<br />

(1899), followed by Great Britain (1909). In 1912 the state Massachusetts in the USA<br />

appointed the minimum wage to women and children work. Minimum wage was legally<br />

introduced in the USA in 1938, in France in 1950 and in Holland in 1968.<br />

Within the EU setting the minimum wage is in the competence of individual economies.<br />

According to Eurostat and The European Foundation for the Improvement of Living and<br />

Working Conditions there are 20 countries which introduced some kind of national<br />

minimum wage (set legally or through collective bargaining). Six countries (Denmark,<br />

Finland, Germany, Austria, Italy, and Sweden) approved minimum-wage tariff settled in<br />

sector collective bargaining. e. g. Cyprus introduced the minimum wage for six selected<br />

professions (Barošová 2008).<br />

Minimum wage in Slovakia<br />

Minimum wage along with mechanism for its setting are in Slovakia defined in the Law<br />

633/2007, Collection of Laws, on Minimum wage, involved in Law 354/2008, Collection of<br />

Laws, and in Law 460/2008, Collection of Laws 6 . Thus in Slovakia, according to the latest<br />

version of the Law, the minimum wage level is for the appropriate calendar year appointed<br />

by the government of the Slovak Republic. For individual sectors, it is, however, allowed to<br />

settle up a higher minimum wage level than that legally defined.<br />

The sum of the minimum wage is adjusted owing to the economic and social conditions of<br />

two previous years coming just before the calendar year for which the level of minimum<br />

4<br />

Dynamic models do not consider negative impacts of minimum wage changes on employment due<br />

to e. g. substitution effects among workers regarding their qualification.<br />

5<br />

Market clearing wage is the result of an upward-sloping labour supply curve and a downwardsloping<br />

labour demand curve. The market labour supply curve is upward sloping; individual firms<br />

are however, facing a horizontal labour supply curve.<br />

6<br />

Introducing a new law on minimum wage the hitherto legislative regulations became void. The<br />

previous law set reduced rates towards selected groups of employees titled to lower rate of 50 % and<br />

75 % from the minimum wage.


Vokorokosová, R., Do Minimum Wage Changes Influence, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 83-90) 85<br />

wage is to be determined. The sum of monthly minimum wage for the coming calendar year is<br />

adjusted according to the national average wage index (Law on Minimum Wage in Slovakia,<br />

current version).<br />

Description of model and data<br />

Models based upon time series usually apply for lagged variables (e. g. minimum wage)<br />

assuming that a certain time has to pass since the effects of minimum wage changes can<br />

occur (Brown, Gilroy and Kohen 1981). Lags are usually set empirically (Hatrák 2007).<br />

Standard statistical model takes a form<br />

k<br />

Y<br />

t<br />

= ∑ β<br />

i<br />

X<br />

ti<br />

+ γT<br />

+<br />

i = 1<br />

u<br />

t<br />

(1)<br />

whereas Yt is employment to population ratio, Xti stands for relevant variables e g. minimum<br />

wage, price index, unit labour costs, etc; T is a time variable, ut is random error term, t stands<br />

for time, β1, ..., βk are parameters, which ceteris paribus indicate relation between<br />

independent variables and dependent variable, γ points out relation between trend variable<br />

and employment. In this article the testing of effects of minimum wage 7 (see values of Kaitz<br />

index on graph 1) for changes upon employment 8 (see graph 2) rests on the standard<br />

statistical model (1) using quarterly data (1996 q2 – 2009q1) from the database of the<br />

Statistical Office of the Slovak Republic (SOSR).<br />

Graph 1. Kaitz index<br />

Reference: Graphical layout based upon SOSR data.<br />

7 Variable Minimum wage is expressed as proportion of minimum wage to national average wage.<br />

8<br />

Employment denotes employment rate which is the ratio of the working labour force<br />

currently employed to the total population in given age. The Organization for Economic Co-operation<br />

and Development defines the employment rate as the percentage of the working age population (ages<br />

15 to 64 in most OECD countries) who are currently employed.


86<br />

Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 83-90)<br />

Models (Model 1: Age groups together; Model 2: Ages 15 – 64) meet assumptions of<br />

classical regression. Variables are integrated of first order I (1). They are co integrated, that<br />

means, their linear combination is I (0), and it is stationary. Lags of exogenous variables were<br />

set empirically.<br />

It is evident that the value of Kaitz index expressed as a share of minimum wage to<br />

average wage level in national economy under Slovak conditions moved from about 33 % at<br />

the beginning of the observed period to about 42 % in the first quarter of the year 2009. Value<br />

of the Kaitz index varies along with the level of average wage in national economy in<br />

corresponding quarter. The level of minimum wage is set forth in advance and remains<br />

unchanged for the entire year in Slovakia.<br />

Regression (2) expresses the relation between minimum wage and employment of both of<br />

the investigated structures - files (one that encompasses all employed people; second that<br />

involves workers in the age 15 - 64) along with a control variable - labour productivity.<br />

Y β + β X + β X 2 + β Y + u ,<br />

(2)<br />

t = 0 1 1t<br />

−1<br />

2 t −1<br />

3 t −1<br />

t<br />

whereas Yt is a time series expressing rate of employment of observed file; X1t is a share of<br />

minimum wage to average wage; X2t denotes labour productivity; ß0,1,2,3, express parameters;<br />

ut denotes random error term. Tables 1, 2 present the results – values of coefficients.<br />

Graph 2. Employment rate<br />

Reference: Graphical layout based upon SOSR data.<br />

Employment rate of observed files seems to be quite stable although some changes<br />

occurred during 1998 and 2003. A disemployment between 1998 and 2001 was a result of<br />

reforms provided for e. g. public finances, taxes, social system and public administration. In<br />

the following period, there was an increasing demand for labour mainly in those companies<br />

absorbing foreign capital that flew e. g. to automobile industry and attendant establishments.<br />

Peculiar for 2001 was the increased number of economically active population year-on-year<br />

by 44 800 people. <strong>Year</strong>-on-year rose the employment by 22 000 people (Domonkos and


Vokorokosová, R., Do Minimum Wage Changes Influence, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 83-90) 87<br />

Pániková 2007). In addition to this one must also take into consideration the demographic<br />

changes in the economy. The share of inhabitants at the post productive age to that of pre<br />

productive age (see graph 3: Ageing index9 of inhabitants together; men; women) keeps<br />

rising.<br />

Graph 3. Ageing index<br />

Reference: Graphical layout based upon SOSR data.<br />

The ageing of inhabitants tends to increase as the values of the ageing index becomes<br />

larger for all observed files (men and women; men; women) achieving the highest values for<br />

women category (its value changed from 108.92 % in 1996 to 184.21 % in 2008). From 2007 to<br />

2008 the value of the index increased in the corresponding file (women) for about 7.31<br />

percentage point.<br />

Ageing index for men finished in 1996 at the value of 55.07 % while in 2008 at the value of<br />

85.44 %. In 1996 the value of the ageing index in the category of men and women together<br />

obtained about 81 % while in 2008 it got about 134 %. So it seems that in 2008 there were<br />

about 134 inhabitants at the post productive age coming to 100 inhabitants at the pre<br />

productive age (0-14).<br />

The number of inhabitants decreases in general, however, as death rate declines and the<br />

length of life becomes longer; there are more and more older people at the post productive<br />

age (over 65 years). This is, however, a general tendency also in other countries. This may<br />

result in the shortage of labours necessary for a certain type of economic sector (Puchá 2005).<br />

A possible solution might be the inflow of foreign labours which could reduce existing gap<br />

on the labour market.<br />

9<br />

Ageing index is calculated as the number of persons 60 years old or over per hundred persons under<br />

´+<br />

65<br />

age 15. In Slovakia it takes following form: Ai = ∗100<br />

.<br />

0 −14


88<br />

Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 83-90)<br />

Table 1. Values of coefficients and standard errors. LS (Least Squares)<br />

Variables<br />

Model 1 (Age groups together: men<br />

and women)<br />

Constant -8.413664**<br />

(2.995541)<br />

MW_AW(-1) 0.144191**<br />

(0.028492)<br />

ER(-1) 1.077487<br />

(0.048238)<br />

PROD(-1) -0.067289**<br />

(0.028022)<br />

R 2 0.931<br />

N number of observations 52<br />

Elasticity<br />

0.102<br />

-0.047<br />

Numbers in parentheses denote standard errors, R 2 – coefficient of determination.<br />

**Significance at 5 %<br />

Investigation results (see table 1) of minimum wage changes (expressed as a share of<br />

minimum wage - MW - to average wage – AW -) and their effects upon employment status<br />

(expressed as employment rate - ER - of men and women) did not confirm a negative<br />

relation between these two variables. There is a negative connection between employment<br />

and labour productivity – PROD. If the share of minimum wage to average wage changes by<br />

1 % 10 , the employment rate increases by about 0.102 %. All variables are used in a lag form.<br />

Any changes in minimum wage/average wage or in labour productivity tend to take some<br />

time until their effects become evident. The lags of variables were set empirically (for one<br />

period of observation that is one quarter).<br />

Table 2 .Values of coefficients and standard errors. LS (Least Squares)<br />

Variables<br />

Model 2<br />

(Age groups 15 – 64)<br />

Constant -9.997505<br />

(3.552217)<br />

MW_AW(-1) 0.168097**<br />

(0.033406)<br />

ER15_64(-1) 1.081321**<br />

(0.049301)<br />

PROD(-1) -0.080012<br />

(0.032629)<br />

R 2 0.929<br />

N number of observations 52<br />

Elasticity<br />

0.119<br />

-0.056<br />

Numbers in parentheses denote standard errors, R 2 – coefficient of determination.<br />

** Significance at 5 %<br />

dY X<br />

10<br />

Based upon calculations of arc elasticity which takes the following form: E Y / X<br />

= * .<br />

dX Y


Vokorokosová, R., Do Minimum Wage Changes Influence, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 83-90) 89<br />

There is a positive relation between minimum wage changes and employment rate of<br />

labours aged 15 – 64 (see table 2). Like in previous model (model 1), a negative relation was<br />

proved among employment rate of corresponding file and labour productivity. A 1 %<br />

increase of minimum wage/average wage in national economy seems to increase the<br />

employment rate of the file under review by about 0.119 % while a 1 % increase of labour<br />

productivity tends to decline the employment rate of labours aged 15 – 64 by about 0.056 %.<br />

Conclusion<br />

Outcomes obtained in this paper do not confirm the theoretical assumption that<br />

minimum wage changes have disemployment effect. In both of the files observed<br />

(employment of men and women regardless age; employment of labours aged 15 – 64) the<br />

positive effect of minimum wage/average wage changes to employment status were found<br />

out. If economy is rising, minimum wage can be rising too. This in fact motivates people<br />

working even those voluntary unemployed (discouraged) ones. As there is a lack of<br />

empirical studies in Slovakia coping with minimum wage influences upon employment, this<br />

article may reduce the existing gap in this research and be useful for institutions having<br />

decision right about minimum wage settings. Pros and cons of minimum wage in economy<br />

are often discussed, but a certain level of minimum wage can protect domestic labour market<br />

from the outflow of domestic labours to foreign countries mainly in the neighbourhood<br />

where they can earn minimum wage higher than it is in their domestic country. It can even<br />

prevent the labour market from the inflow of a cheap labour from abroad. Nowadays it is<br />

not about abolishing the minimum wage in countries where it already exists, but it is often<br />

discussed in economies which still do not have any kind of guarantee of minimum earning.<br />

Beside other advantages it presents a country´s interest to handle the issue of poverty and<br />

willingness to ensure a certain level of living also for those which earn the lowest amount of<br />

money. Since there are still different opinions on how the minimum wage changes effect<br />

employment, working papers relating to this issue in different countries are a good source of<br />

valuable information for all subjects involved in this matter.<br />

References<br />

Barošová, M. 2008: Fungovanie a vývoj minimálnej mzdy v Slovenskej republike. FÓRUM SOCIÁLNÍ<br />

POLITIKY 5/2008.<br />

Brown, Ch. - Gilroy, C. - Kohen, A. 1981: Effects of the Minimum Wage on Employment and<br />

Unemployment. <strong>Journal</strong> of Economic Literature. Vol. XX.<br />

Brown, Ch. - Gilroy, C. - Kohen, A. 1983: Time-Series Evidence of the Effect of the Minimum Wage on<br />

Youth Employment, <strong>Journal</strong> of Human Resources. .<br />

Card, D. - Krueger, A. 1994: Minimum wages and employment: A case study of the fast-food industry<br />

in New Jersey and Pennsylvania. American Economic Review.<br />

Domonkos,T. – Pániková, L. 2007: Analýza a modelovanie dopytu po práci v podmienkach slovenskej<br />

ekonomiky. INFOSTAT, Bratislava.<br />

Eriksson, T. – Pytlikova, M. 2004: Firm-level Consequences of Large Minimum-wage Increases in the<br />

Czech and Slovak Republics. Labour, Vol. 18, No. 1.<br />

Hatrák, M. 2007: Ekonometria. Bratislava: Iura Edition.


90<br />

Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 83-90)<br />

Neumark, D. – Wascher, W. 1992: Employment effects of Minimum and subminimum wages: Panel<br />

Data on State Minimum Wage Laws. Industrial and Labour Relations Review, Vol. 46, No. 1.<br />

OECD 1998: Statutory Minimum Wages, Employment and Poverty. OECD Employment<br />

Outlook.<br />

Puchá, N. 2005: Komparatívne a konkurenčné výhody v novej ekonomike. In: Zborník príspevkov zo<br />

4. Medzinárodnej doktorandskej konferencie: Ekonomické, politické a právne otázky medzinárodných<br />

vzťahov. Ekonomická univerzita Bratislava, Fakulta Medzinárodných vzťahov.<br />

Ragan, J. 1977: Minimum wages and the youth labour market. Review of Economics and Statistic 59.<br />

Samson, Š. 2008: Dejiny ekonomických teórií – Ekonomické myslenie v predhistórii, klasická<br />

a neoklasická ekonómia. Košice: Elfa.<br />

Vokorokosová, R. 2008: Minimálna mzda a konkurencieschopnosť. Košice: Elfa.<br />

Welch, F. 1976: The minimum wage legislation in the United States. Evaluating the labour market<br />

effects of social programs, Princeston University.<br />

Zavodny, M. 1998: Why Minimum Wage Hikes May Not Reduce Employment. Federal Reserve Bank<br />

of Atlanta. Economic Review, Q2.<br />

Law on Minimum Wage in Slovakia (current version of Minimum Wage Law)<br />

www.wikipedia.com<br />

www.statistics.sk<br />

Longman Dictionary of Contemporary English, 1978.<br />

Article history:<br />

Received: 8 January 2010<br />

Accepted: 7 March 2010


SCIENTIFIC REVIEW<br />

Information Resources for Financial Monitoring<br />

in Enterprises<br />

Kościelniak Helena * , Czestochowa University of Technology,<br />

The Management Faculty, Poland<br />

UDC: 65.012.12 JEL: D83<br />

ABSTARCT – For their operation, organizations employ a particular combination of human,<br />

financial, material and information resources. Except for land, capital and labour, information has<br />

become the fourth means of production since it is used for achievement of the goals. Not all<br />

information that appear in economy becomes a means of production; this happens only in the case of<br />

information which shows nature of economic resources. W. Olejniczak emphasizes that a set of<br />

information, in order to become an economic value for an enterprise, must form an ordered set.<br />

Financial monitoring is one of the most creative tools for management, allowing for creation of new<br />

information and decision-related resources.<br />

KEY WORDS: financial monitoring, production, management, enterprise, decision-making,<br />

information<br />

Information gap in the process of decision-making<br />

Under conditions of changing economy, information performs three functions (Penc<br />

2001):<br />

• it is a commodity; transactions might concern information-related products<br />

(particular type of information saved on a suitable carrier) or information services<br />

which consist in acquisition and making available a particular piece of<br />

information,<br />

• it is a resource, i.e. a group of particular pieces of information collected in suitable<br />

carriers, available to potential users, used in widely understood social and<br />

economic life,<br />

• it is a production factor.<br />

• It is emphasized that information sets might be analysed in three aspects<br />

(Olejniczak 1989):<br />

• syntax – by investigating the relationships between symbols representing<br />

economic information, without consideration of its content,<br />

• semantics – by investigating the content of economic information and the method<br />

of its representation by means of symbols,<br />

*<br />

Address: Armii Krajowej 19B, 42-200 Czestochowa, Poland


92<br />

Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 91-98)<br />

• pragmatics – by investigating economic information from the point of view of its<br />

value for the recipient.<br />

Solving decision problems is connected with continuous accumulation of information.<br />

The difference between information which decision-makers would like to have and the<br />

information that can be actually acquired is termed ‘information gap’; it denotes sensation of<br />

lack of information, knowledge or understanding of a problem, which is necessary in<br />

decision-related situation.<br />

This indicates that it is of a highly subjective nature while its main properties include:<br />

• reference to a particular subject (lack of information sensed by a person is not<br />

necessarily sensed by another),<br />

• susceptibility to time factor (with the course of time and acquisition of<br />

information, the gap can be extended or reduced),<br />

• fuzzy information (limits opportunity to define its scope) (Flakiewicz 2002).<br />

Figure 1. The concept of information gap in the process of decision-making<br />

Progress in definition of the problem and acquisition<br />

of information<br />

Needed<br />

information<br />

Collected<br />

information<br />

Moment of final definition<br />

of the problem and<br />

making a decision<br />

Information gap<br />

Resoruces used for definition of the problem (money,<br />

Source: (Rabin, Jackowski 1988)<br />

For the purposes of management, it is essential that a particular quality of the prepared<br />

information, being the basis for decision-making, is ensured. This problem was emphasized<br />

by J. Penc. The author argues that proper decision is composed of 80% of information, 10% of<br />

inspiration (invention) and 10% of managers’ intuition (sensing) (Penc 2001).<br />

Functional properties of information obtained from users are presented in Table 1.


Kościelniak, H., Information Resources for Financial Monitoring, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 91-98) 93<br />

Table 1. Quality features of output information<br />

Feature<br />

Reliability<br />

Selectivity<br />

Addressability<br />

Relevance<br />

Right on time<br />

Requested form<br />

Characteristics of output information<br />

factual (according to actual state) description of economic events and<br />

states<br />

Adapted to the characteristics of the problem or used method of<br />

management<br />

Adapted to individual need of a particular recipients, determined by<br />

the nature of the tasks they perform<br />

Relevant to particular demand for information (providing recipients<br />

with convenient tools for searching and extraction of data)<br />

Delivered on demand in right time (during decision situation) or<br />

periodical data within clearly defined deadlines<br />

Alphanumerical (text, tabular or graphical) with the level of detail<br />

(elementary data or aggregated, levels of summaries) and the carrier<br />

(screen, printouts, magnetic carriers) according to the recipients<br />

demands<br />

Source: (Niedzielska 1998)<br />

Maintaining quality features of information affects its value, suitability and usefulness<br />

within information base in a particular enterprise.<br />

Position of financial monitoring in information base in enterprises<br />

Monitoring is an informational mechanism which allows for tracking quantitative and<br />

qualitative changes of some predetermined objects of observations, using particular<br />

techniques of registration.<br />

Subject literature points to the following functions of monitoring:<br />

• collecting and processing of information and distribution of this information<br />

(Kowalczyk 2003),<br />

• formation of normative models, formation of empirical models and assessment of<br />

information and information processes (Oleński 2001),<br />

• definition of research areas in enterprises subject to monitoring, definition of<br />

standards and criteria for these areas, selection of rules for response to deviations<br />

and creation of organized forms of informational feed (Leszczyński 2002),<br />

• identification and selection of object of observation, description of objects by<br />

means of a pattern, registration of the results of object operation, comparison of<br />

patterns to the results, ordering and making available the results and patterns<br />

(Mytlewski 2007).<br />

On the basis of the abovementioned functions, it can be concluded that monitoring can be<br />

perceived as:<br />

• observation and suitably organized registration of all the parameters, events,<br />

situations connected with object operation, which might affect functioning of the<br />

whole object or its considerable part,


94<br />

Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 91-98)<br />

• current control of execution of the plan along with confrontation of the degree of<br />

using budget with the plan for the performed tasks,<br />

• arduous research work allowing for assessment of decision accuracy and its<br />

correction as need arises,<br />

• informing decision-makers about possible threats and forcing them to respond.<br />

Application of the concept of monitoring for operation of companies allows for<br />

separation of a research area for financial monitoring from the wholeness of its business<br />

activity.<br />

Financial monitoring is a tool for management in the area of functioning of financial<br />

processes in enterprises. It is understood as a process of continuous economic and financial<br />

analysis supporting the process of making decisions by managers.<br />

Figure 2. Place of financial monitoring in management system<br />

Management Function<br />

Management Tools<br />

Planning<br />

Organization<br />

Leadership<br />

Controlling<br />

Key Areas<br />

Analysis<br />

Methodology<br />

Standards<br />

High Frequency<br />

Financial Monitoring<br />

Decision and Information Flow<br />

Source: (Skowronek_Mielczarek, Leszczyński 2007)<br />

Implementation of financial monitoring calls for meeting the following conditions:<br />

• definition of the need for continuous analysis,<br />

• proper description of financial events resulting from company’s operation using<br />

particular methodology.<br />

Investigating of information needs in a company requires methodical approach; example<br />

of such approaches are presented in Table 3.


Kościelniak, H., Information Resources for Financial Monitoring, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 91-98) 95<br />

Table 3. Methodical approaches used to define information needs of users<br />

Method Description Application<br />

By-Product Investigation of needs is a sideeffect<br />

since its main goal is to<br />

investigate final product<br />

Used during development of subsystem<br />

problems; advantages include laboureffectiveness<br />

and short time necessary<br />

for investigations; disadvantages: in<br />

most of cases decision – maker needs<br />

are only partially met<br />

Total Study<br />

Critical Success<br />

Factor<br />

Key Indicator<br />

System<br />

Business<br />

Information<br />

Characteristics<br />

Study<br />

Business Process<br />

Model<br />

Investigating of bigger group of<br />

executives<br />

The areas which should be under<br />

constant supervision of<br />

management are defined<br />

Rests on selecting of key indicator<br />

of ‘health’ within an organization<br />

aimed at collecting of the data<br />

which can be processed into<br />

different sets of information<br />

On the basis of information model<br />

of organization, so called unique<br />

resources are defined, which<br />

facilitates analysis of current<br />

databases and problems<br />

encountered by management, a set<br />

of unique identifiers, characterizing<br />

management objects within an<br />

organization are created. The<br />

identifier and relating data<br />

comprise ‘resources’ with actual<br />

data, which allows for highlighting<br />

problems which impact on<br />

company performance.<br />

Aims at recognition of basic, initial<br />

units which initiate processing of<br />

input information realized in next<br />

phases, such as: preparation of<br />

general plan, verification of<br />

economic processes in companies<br />

and their units.<br />

The critical areas of activities are<br />

defined, however, it requires use of<br />

considerable resources<br />

Analysis of progress in realization of<br />

tasks allows on current assessment of<br />

management performance; high labourconsumption<br />

of work<br />

It allows for separation of common<br />

types of functions, whose performance<br />

requires relevant information. An<br />

attempt to identify environment and to<br />

define hierarchy of goals is also made;<br />

difficulties include objective definition<br />

of these goals/functions and<br />

decomposition.<br />

Elimination of ‘information scatter’<br />

between information system and needs,<br />

shortens the process of improving of<br />

insufficient information which can not<br />

be recognized through another analysis;<br />

it accelerates production of software<br />

fourfold on average.<br />

It is possible to create, in a written form,<br />

a model of the processes which occur in<br />

organization and the analysis of the<br />

needs and flows in organization<br />

connected with these processes and, in<br />

consequence, it allows for recognition<br />

of data transferred between economic<br />

processes in the organization.


96<br />

Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 91-98)<br />

Method Description Application<br />

Enterprise Activity<br />

Matrix<br />

Information Control<br />

Net Model<br />

Rests on a theory of organization<br />

with limited number of tasks<br />

(activities) and these tasks being<br />

performed by means of subject of<br />

labour available in a company. In<br />

consequence, a matrix including all<br />

activities within an organization<br />

can be created. It mainly requires<br />

definition of activities in<br />

organization (what is being done),<br />

environmental conditions (how it is<br />

being done) and subjects of<br />

activities (what is used to perform<br />

the activities)<br />

Formal model of determination of<br />

users needs in office environment; it<br />

is formed by graphical techniques<br />

and standard notation, which forms<br />

a framework for collecting data,<br />

imposes coherence, completeness,<br />

logical organization and is<br />

conducive to comparison of<br />

alternative procedures, preparation<br />

of forms and data sets.<br />

Source: (Kisielnicki, Sroka 1999)<br />

It gives management a view of<br />

everything what happens or should<br />

happen through the method of task<br />

assignment and a demanded<br />

information system characteristics<br />

Used for representation and analysis of<br />

flows of information in progress,<br />

procedures for activities simplifies them<br />

and automates overlaying activities.<br />

Financial monitoring suits very well to the methodical approaches listed in the table. It<br />

combines features of all the described methods used for determination of users’<br />

informational needs.<br />

Financial monitoring is a system which integrates the methods of processing and flow of<br />

different streams of information with management system (Komorowski 2001) and supports<br />

management in supervising the most significant components in operation of entities<br />

(Kisielnicki, Sroka 1999).<br />

A. Skowronek-Mielczarek and Z. Leszczyński point to important and specific features of<br />

financial monitoring, including (Skowronek-Mielczarek, Leszczyński 2007):<br />

• selection of key areas of management of company’s finance,<br />

• definition of standards and reference bases, which become the basis for<br />

assessment and verification of activity,<br />

• application of tools for modern financial analysis,<br />

• continuous observation and registration of changes in the investigated financial<br />

processes.<br />

In consideration of the features of monitoring it is remarkable that it comprises the basis<br />

for creation of new informational and decision-related resources for enterprises. System of


Kościelniak, H., Information Resources for Financial Monitoring, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 91-98) 97<br />

monitoring supports management of enterprises through early warning and assessment of<br />

threats during operation of businesses. It also reduces information gap (see Figure 3).<br />

Figure 3. Information System and Financial Monitoring<br />

Real area of enterprise<br />

Information system in enterprise<br />

Information gap<br />

Collected information<br />

Needed information<br />

Financial monitoring<br />

Gap reduction<br />

Source: own study on the basis of (Mytlewski 2007, Rabin, Jackowski 1988)<br />

Summary<br />

To sum up, it can be concluded that monitoring system, being a subsystem for<br />

information systems in enterprises, overtakes the tasks of information system and is in tune<br />

with it in terms of functions, language and tools. Moreover, monitoring system integrates<br />

management and formal requirements. In target model, it should lead to reaching a<br />

compromise between interests of all parties which communicated the demand for<br />

information in enterprises through giving them access to any profile of information.<br />

References<br />

Flakiewicz W., Systemy informacyjne w zarządzaniu (uwarunkowania, technologie, rodzaje), Wydawnictwo<br />

C.H. Beck, Warsaw 2002<br />

Kisielnicki J., Sroka H., Systemy informacyjne biznesu. Placet, Warsaw, 1999<br />

Komorowski: Planowanie finansowanie w przedsiębiorstwie. ODiDK, Gdańsk 2001<br />

Kowalczyk S., Informacja w monitorowaniu otoczenia organizacji, [in] red. R. Borowiecki, M. Kwieciński,<br />

Monitorowanie otoczenia. Przepływ i bezpieczeństwo informacji. W stronę inteligencji, KW, Zakamycze<br />

2003<br />

Leszczyński Z., Monitoring finansowy w zarządzaniu małym i średnim przedsiębiorstwem; [in] Zarządzanie<br />

małym i średnim przedsiębiorstwem. Uwarunkowania europejskie. Red. M. Strużycki, Difin, Warsaw<br />

2002<br />

Łukasik-Makowska B., Niedzielska E., Społeczeństwo informacyjne – już teraźniejszość czy dopiero<br />

perspektywa? [in:] Informacja w społeczeństwie XXI wieku, red. A. Łapińska, Uniwersytet Warmińsko-


98<br />

Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 91-98)<br />

Mazurski, Olsztyn 2003Mytlewski A., Monitoring ekonomiczny przedsiębiorstw, Wydawnictwo<br />

Uniwersytetu Gdańskiego, Gdańsk 2007<br />

Niedzielska E., Informatyka ekonomiczna, Wydawnictwo Akademii Ekonomicznej, Wrocław 1998.<br />

Olejniczak W., Projektowanie systemów informacji ekonomicznej w przedsiębiorstwie, PWE, Warsaw 1989<br />

Oleński J., Ekonomika informacji, PWE, Warsaw 2001<br />

Penc J., Decyzje menedżerskie – o sztuce zarządzania. Beck, Warsaw 2001<br />

Rabin J., Jackowski E. M., Handbook of Information Resource Management, Marcel Dekker, New York<br />

1988.<br />

Skowronek-Mielczarek A., Leszczyński Z., Controlling. Analiza i monitoring w zarządzaniu<br />

przedsiębiorstwem, Difin, Warsaw 2007.<br />

Article history:<br />

Received: 12 January 2010<br />

Accepted: 7 March 2010


ORIGINAL SCIENTIFIC PAPER<br />

Business Relations in Reverse Logistics Outsourcing<br />

Grabara Janusz * , Kot Sebastian, Czestochowa University of Technology,<br />

The Management Faculty, Poland<br />

UDC: 65.011.1 JEL: M1; M2<br />

ABSTRACT – Nowadays cost reduction is a fundamental strategy used in companies during<br />

fighting for survival, keeping or increase in sales levels and profits. More and more often observed<br />

tendency to concentrate commercial and production companies leads to rise of demand for outsourcing<br />

in a reverse logistics chain. In the paper Authors present concept of outsourcing in logistics processes,<br />

advantages of outsourcing in reverse logistics and types of relations between outsourcing partners as<br />

well as areas and stages of collaboration: engagement, improvement and communication.<br />

KEY WORDS: business relations, outsourcing, logistics processes, commercial companies,<br />

production companies<br />

Outsourcing idea in logistics services<br />

A strategy commonly termed ‘outsourcing’ is nothing more than a subcontracting, to a<br />

specialized companies, a part of functions and processes previously performed on your own.<br />

The scope of operations encompassed by outsourcing is becoming wider and wider. The<br />

subcontracting concerns e.g.: transport and forwarding (organizing of transport by the<br />

shipper), advertising, market survey, security services, social facilities (holiday and sport<br />

facilities), health care, legal services, training, financing of transactions, banking services and<br />

contract insurance. Outsourcing concerns exclusively services.<br />

Another words Henry Ford characterized very appositely phenomenon which is<br />

specified today with name of outsourcing. ʺIf there is something we cannot do more efficiently,<br />

more inexpensively and better than our competitors, so there is no sense we do it. We should employ<br />

somebody for executing this work who will do it betterʺ (Michałek 2005). He didnʹt foresee at the<br />

same time probably that the assertion just even often unwittingly is a base for todayʹs<br />

entrepreneursʹ wondering reflections above applying outsourcing to oneʹs companies.<br />

Outsourcing describes the deliberate movement of a series of connected business<br />

processes to a which manages them on behalf of the company. The classic processes were IT,<br />

warehousing and distribution, facilities management, and payroll – and to these can now be<br />

added call centers, manufacturing, web development, home shopping, credit cards, and even<br />

merchandising and design. In these movements the commercial risk and assets are usually<br />

passed to the outsourcing company (Waters 2007).<br />

No doubt that outsourcing has become big business. From early beginnings in the mid- to<br />

late 1970s, many companies have traveled the outsourcing road, and as technology and<br />

*<br />

Address: Armii Krajowej 19B, 42-200 Czestochowa, Poland, e-mail: grabara@zim.pcz.pl


100<br />

Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 99-107)<br />

accessibility to shared electronic data have increased so has the range of services offered by<br />

outsourcing companies.<br />

The global logistics market has an estimated value of 972 billion US dollars (Transport<br />

Intelligence 2006). The Asia Pacific market was the largest with the share of 412 billion USD<br />

spent on logistics. Europe, Middle East and Africa regions spent about 290 billion USD,<br />

while Americas accounts for the balance of 270 billion USD.<br />

It is estimated that 265 billion USD (27%) was spent for outsourced logistics activities.<br />

Western European firms are more likely to outsource logistics and supply chain activity.<br />

Capgemini study (Capgemini and Langley 2004) showed that Western European businesses<br />

spent 61% of their logistics spend on their third-party provider services against 44% in North<br />

America and 49% in Asia Pacific.<br />

Globalization and increase in world trade has made the fast growth in the outsourcing<br />

market. As more products are sourced across borders, the complexity of the supply chain<br />

increases, driving many companies to outsource to third-party providers. This is particularly<br />

true as companies move manufacturing and operations to regions such as Asia, Eastern<br />

Europe or South America, where they seek to mitigate risk by outsourcing their logistics and<br />

supply chain operations.<br />

Outsourcing of logistics services may take a variety of sizes and shapes. In its most<br />

extreme form it leads to total liquidation of own logistics system and taking on responsibility<br />

for logistics management by external operator.<br />

In logistics outsourcing the lead is taken by international operators with necessary<br />

competence in terms of logistics strategic consulting and the execution potential connected<br />

with the branch experience. The operator must ensure their customers as best services as<br />

possible at the competitive price. In Polish market two following groups of logistics services<br />

can be characterized:<br />

• transport services, which should be treated as fundamental services resulting<br />

from the necessity to move things and persons from one place to another,<br />

between the source and the goal, with the limited scope of consulting, which<br />

might concern, in case of e.g. international deliveries, the most favourable supply<br />

base. Relocation- transport is an activity performed in order to satisfy particular<br />

needs, which requires to cover the distances either by a person or by goods in<br />

order to satisfy such needs. (Szczepaniak 2002)<br />

• forwarding services, which, in its fundamental form consist in organization of the<br />

transport processes, insurance, preparation of necessary documentation and<br />

customs services. More advanced shipping services, which bring great cost<br />

benefits in case of general cargo or pallet cargo (as opposed to full truck load),<br />

include services provided by the consolidated shippers on the basis of the<br />

network of several or more than ten terminals, which consists in consolidation or<br />

deconsolidation of a particular cargo, custom packaging, with warehousing<br />

option and in more modern version of cross docking and thus in transition of<br />

cargo through terminal (without warehousing) and stopping their movement<br />

only for the time necessary for order picking, changes in cargo shape and changes<br />

in means of transport.


Grabara, J., et al., Business Relations in Reverse Logistics, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 99-107) 101<br />

• logistics services, which, apart from transport and forwarding activities,<br />

encompasses terminal services, starting from cross-docking, through warehousing<br />

to order picking (including picking and packaging) and additional activities:<br />

labelling, re-packing, foil packing, minor repairs, creation of promotional sets etc.<br />

(sometimes referred to as co-packing). Moreover, logistics companies often<br />

control their clients’ inventory, undertake complex servicing of distribution or<br />

logistic consulting – reaching far more than a selection of the route for deliveries<br />

or a supply base. The basis for creation of logistics services is to own a wide area<br />

computer network which might be connected with a client’s network in a variety<br />

of configurations.<br />

A company, which intends to subcontract logistics services to another external company<br />

should realize that they will partially or totally lose control over some processes connected<br />

with logistics. A considerable role is played by successful cooperation based on partnership<br />

of both companies and mutual trust (Rydzkowski 2004).<br />

In order for this goal to be achieved, companies often abandon performance of various<br />

traditional activities e.g. legal services, research, pay policy, accounting services through<br />

transfer of these service to specialized external companies. Such a policy enables company to<br />

focus their assets and efforts on what they can do best, e.g. on production, commercial<br />

activity or providing the services. Many companies which need to reduce its organizational<br />

structure finds logistics to be an activity, which can be disposed of in order to reduce costs<br />

and to improve the customer service.<br />

While highlighting the concept of outsourcing one should consider what makes the<br />

companies order logistics activities from specialized external services. The reasons<br />

for such activities are numerous, however, the most important include the need for<br />

having logistics activities performed in best way as possible, which is possible in case<br />

of these activities being performed by a specialized entities with appropriate<br />

infrastructure and capacity which enable logistics services to be provided on possibly<br />

highest level. Thus it seems that the argument for such a cooperation is lack of<br />

workload within the company which can focus on its core activities as well as<br />

easiness of flexible response to any changes within its environment. The advantages<br />

concern also economical aspect, through reduction in costs and service area both<br />

inside the company as well as services for customers. Obviously, such a solution has<br />

particular disadvantages due to the possibility to be dependent on external service<br />

provider as well as loss of own know-how in terms of technology and logistics<br />

knowledge. Therefore, a company which makes a decision on outsourcing should<br />

consider arguments both for and against it. Main factors for outsourcing include<br />

(Duck and Schotz 1998):<br />

• the costs related to logistics activity are clearer, mainly through easiness of their<br />

recording,<br />

• cost reduction is possible through selection of most competitive offer in the<br />

market, which enable more flexible use of the owned resources,<br />

• levelling of internal problems which make performance of tasks difficult.


102<br />

Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 99-107)<br />

The arguments against implementation of outsourcing include:<br />

• probability of being dependent on service provider,<br />

• risk of deterioration in quality of own products (e.g. improperly transported),<br />

• necessity of exact calculations in terms of costs, especially in the aspect of cost<br />

reduction,<br />

• lack of possibility to use experience in logistics obtained during operation in the<br />

market.<br />

The companies who decide to subcontract logistics activities outside focus more on<br />

coordination of operation within the area of cooperation with service provider and they can<br />

organize their logistics system so that it functions more efficiently within the chain. The<br />

solutions for organization of logistics processes enable formation of such structures which<br />

will enable using of all advantages of the described solutions. It should be considered if the<br />

companies are able to form their logistics chains so that all logistic activities and processes<br />

connected with their coordination are performed in a way that enables formation of an<br />

efficient structure adapted to the needs so that the achievement of the predefined goal of<br />

logistically managed organization is possible, i.e. finding right customers and ensuring them<br />

availability of the offered goods. From the company’s point of view the processes should be<br />

efficient both organizationally and economically.<br />

The processes which occur in contemporary economy indicate evolution, leading to the<br />

situation in which traditional divisions which separated production, commerce and service<br />

companies are fading away. More and more often logistics systems of separated companies<br />

are being replaced by whole logistics systems of logistics chains. The definition of the essence<br />

of logistics activities is becoming more and more difficult, mainly due to the fact of faded<br />

borders between companies. Evolution of outsourcing leads to the situation where instead of<br />

normal subcontracting of services such as transport or warehousing a so called third party,<br />

and even the fourth-party logistics, is implemented for virtually total acquisition of the<br />

logistics area. The concerns may arise if employing external service provider, particularly a<br />

close cooperation with them, do not lead to losing control over the processes, which is very<br />

important as the companies which provide outsourcing services are on the supplier-customer<br />

interface. Thus, they should organize the processes, to the benefit of the client, so that the<br />

customers are satisfied and buy goods from our company. On the other hand, the fact that<br />

logistics services providers are actually only an intermediaries, who not necessarily identify<br />

themselves with the company’s goals, might cause that they are not intent on satisfying the<br />

customer. This situation is dangerous and might lead to losing positive image by the<br />

company, which, in consequence, negatively impacts on the sales. On the other hand, despite<br />

some threats of using outsourcing, proper operation of companies (especially those operating<br />

in global markets) without using logistics services is actually not possible. This happens<br />

because one company is not able to specialize so much as to become a leader in production,<br />

marketing and logistics and other areas of operation. The competition between supply chains<br />

has become so strong that it is necessary to look for new solutions which enable to gain<br />

competitive advantage (Schary, Skjott-Larsen 2002). One of them is outsourcing in reverse<br />

logistics.


Grabara, J., et al., Business Relations in Reverse Logistics, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 99-107) 103<br />

Typical activities of reverse logistics include processes which the company uses to collect<br />

worn out, damaged, unwanted or outdated products and the processes of packaging or<br />

sending materials from final user to manufacturer.<br />

If the products are returned to the company, the company has a variety of possibilities to<br />

handle them. If there is possibility to return a product to supplier at the full cost<br />

reimbursement, the company might choose this option as first. If the product has not been<br />

used yet, it can be re-sold to another customer or might be re-sold in the manufacturer’s<br />

shop. If the product is not of full value to be sold, it is passed to the repair services company,<br />

which, after appropriate repairs and improvements will export this product to the market.<br />

If a product can not be sold in current condition or if the company can considerably<br />

increase its price through renovation, recovery or processing of the product, the company<br />

can perform such activities before the product is sold. If the company does not perform such<br />

activities in its location, the intermediary companies, cooperating on the basis of contract or<br />

through outsourcing, can be involved in this procedure or the product might be sold<br />

immediately to the company which renovates, recovers or processes products.<br />

After performing these activities, the product might be sold as a renovated product or a<br />

processed product but not as a new one. If the product can not be renovated due to its bad<br />

condition or the environmental law does not permit to do this, the company can try to use<br />

this product at the lowest possible cost of production. The reverse logistics might involve a<br />

wide variety of activities. These activities might be performed in the following way: goods,<br />

materials, product or package in reverse flow return from end user or other user in<br />

distribution channel such as retailer or distribution centre. Independently of its final<br />

designation, all products in the reverse flow must be stored and sorted before despatch to<br />

the final destination locations.<br />

If a product gets to reverse logistics flow from the customer, this might be a damaged<br />

product. The customer might also only think that the product is damaged while it is actually<br />

in good repair. This might result from customer’s lack of knowledge on using a particular<br />

product.<br />

If a product has not reached the final stage of its life, the customer may return the<br />

product to the service shop or directly to manufacturer. If the product has reached its final<br />

stage of usability, the customer may, in some cases, return product to manufacturer and a<br />

producer might use it in an appropriate way or to recover materials.<br />

If a product is returned by the partner in supply chain, this occurs because the product<br />

has not been sold or the partner wanted to get rid of it. The product might also reach its final<br />

stage of life or final stage of regular sales season. The product might also be damaged or<br />

destroyed.<br />

Reverse logistics is strategically used mainly to enable users of a traditional channel –<br />

such as retailers and wholesalers – to take opportunity of reduction of risk of buying<br />

products which might not sell perfectly. For example, a company might create a software<br />

which controls the number of returns for various products depending on different elements<br />

which characterize particular groups of products.<br />

Strategy which involves possibilities of reverse logistics considerably impacts on<br />

company’s cost. The goal of almost each business is to attach its customers to the company so<br />

as the customer do not change the supplier. There are many methods to build relationships


104<br />

Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 99-107)<br />

which make it difficult to the customer and which put customers at risk of losing the benefits<br />

in case they change suppliers. An important services which supplier can offer to the<br />

customer is to give opportunity to return not sold or damaged products immediately, which<br />

credits customers on a temporary basis.<br />

Initiation of reverse logistics might be a strategic response to a situation of growth in<br />

competitive environment. Most of sellers and manufacturers have in recent years liberalized<br />

its policy of returns, due to the pressure from competitors. The companies still believe that<br />

the satisfied customer and ensuring possibilities of returns of unwanted products (which,<br />

according to the customers do not match their needs) are essential.<br />

Cooperation in reverse logistics might concern its all aspects and activities such as<br />

collective planning, forecasting, design or marketing. This is essential due to the following<br />

benefits resulting from cooperation:<br />

• possibility of integrated information;<br />

• possibility of tracking and monitoring of events in supply chain;<br />

• improvement in clarity in supply chain;<br />

• possibility of managing the processes through corrective actions.<br />

Advantages of reverse logistics outsourcing<br />

Reduction of costs connected with logistics is justified in case when it leads to increase in<br />

profits. Currently the most popular form of saving in logistics departments is outsourcing of<br />

supply chain (Skowron-Grabowska 2008). Such a decision might impact on flows and<br />

financial results.<br />

First remarkable advantage is cumulating of commitments in the moment of the whole<br />

process of delivery. The settlements between individual suppliers are transferred to a<br />

logistics companies. The ordering entity gets the elongated deadline for payments and better<br />

opportunities to negotiate the price. The financial sources released in such a way increase its<br />

current assets.<br />

In order to execute the logistics processes it is necessary to involve fixed assets with a<br />

considerable value. They are mainly used for maintenance of distribution systems. In such<br />

systems, the resources of enormous value are employed – warehouses, distribution centres,<br />

local storage areas. The physical flow of goods between points of sale is realized also by the<br />

fleets which usually belong to the companies themselves and not to the specialized service<br />

providers. More and more often a tendency appears to rationalize distribution systems, e.g.<br />

through using specialized services of suppliers of complex logistics solutions. This tendency<br />

arose from the popular belief that actual cost of financing of investments with fixed assets is<br />

sometimes much higher than the cost generated by the investment.<br />

Another element which makes companies to abandon the attempts to extend fixed assets<br />

connected with logistics is the efficiency of their use. The logistics companies show higher<br />

flexibility in terms of warehousing facilities and fleet. Another advantage of subcontracting<br />

the supply chain maintenance to a specialized logistics company is a fact of savings, which<br />

appears as a result of liquidation of the transport/warehousing departments. Such units,<br />

apart form labour costs, absorb a lot of expenditures connected with purchase of software<br />

(Kot and Slusarczyk 2009). A drawback of most of these systems is the price and lack of


Grabara, J., et al., Business Relations in Reverse Logistics, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 99-107) 105<br />

possibilities to be used in other departments. Logistics companies also make use of advanced<br />

systems, however, the cost of their purchase might be spread among a few clients.<br />

Among numerous benefits connected with a supply chain outsourcing, having influence<br />

on financial standing of the company, the most important include:<br />

1. Increase in current assets through more profitable form of liabilities and<br />

opportunity to achieve time compression.<br />

2. Better use of fixed assets.<br />

3. Reduction in costs not connected with core activities in the company.<br />

Relationship in outsourcing activity<br />

The 3pl/customer relationship is one where “partnership” can provide the basis for the<br />

business relationship and outsourcing success. The confirmation of this can be words of J.<br />

Rodriguez: “If you understand the customer’s business model, the markets and geographies it wants<br />

to penetrate, the verticals it wants to target, its different manufacturing options and so on, you can<br />

continue to find low-hanging fruit. But if your relationship is just as a vendor of logistics services,<br />

you hit a brick wall.” (Murphy 2005)<br />

Continuing, partnership has to be on both fronts. The customer has to allow the service<br />

provider to become an intricate part of its business and look beyond the service it currently is<br />

providing. Good partnerships share joint development, benefits and common strategic<br />

vision.<br />

Collaboration with high degree of trust is next step of engagement in relation between<br />

outsourcing partners. J. Grubic (Grubic 2006) writes that the degree of trust in a relationship<br />

determines the level of flexibility a customer will allow the 3PL in operating the best of its<br />

capability. He also argues that this flexibility is necessary to deliver best-in-class process and<br />

solutions and in turn achieve the required performance and cost objectives. Good<br />

collaboration will support business change and challenges, allowing both parties to review<br />

continually the current state against the vision and to agree actions to be taken to stay on<br />

course.<br />

Sometimes outsourcing partners went to a business trap when thinking that all problems<br />

with logistics and supply chain processes have gone away to the 3PL. In fact some problems<br />

may now be a responsibility of the 3PL, others still remain firmly the responsibility of<br />

customers, and moreover there are some new issues to do how to manage the relationship.<br />

Outsourcing will not work unless the customer stays deeply involved (Bowman 2006). It is<br />

really important that customers stay involved but they should focus on managing the 3PLs<br />

on strategic level, not to be involved in every decision taken by the 3PL. However, a good<br />

customer will want to collaborate around those activities that directly impact on service and<br />

where is a touch-point with their business.<br />

We can point on following stages of collaboration between outsourcing partners:<br />

Engagement where IT system integration, account management and implants are most<br />

important. Part of the engagement between 3PL and its customer is the way of data<br />

interchange. It is extremely important to tightly integrate the 3PL system with the client’s<br />

ERP system. High level of integration allows for fast flow of high volume data. The process


106<br />

Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 99-107)<br />

is extremely reliable, with leading integration platforms having audit techniques that can<br />

signal an alert if message leave one system but are not received or processed in the other.<br />

The 3Pl providers have also seen the opportunity for embedding implants into their<br />

customers operation for some time now. There is no better way to meet the customer<br />

requirement and understand its aims than to provide an implant working side by side in a<br />

planning or other supply chain role. Account management is also important, because of it<br />

can help in the retention of customers, lead to more business with clients, potentially leading<br />

to improved profits for the 3PL and customers as well. By helping the customer to improve<br />

its operations, costs or sales, the 3PL is adding value.<br />

In continuous improvement stage, we can point on the sector expertise, process<br />

improvement and innovation as a main elements. One of the factors that 3Pl offers their<br />

customers is expertise in the industry sector concerned. This provides the opportunity to<br />

help clients understand industry best practices and to provide benchmarking data.<br />

Moreover, many times 3PLs provide customers ideas they had learned in other industries.<br />

The continuous improvement contains also process improvement. Resulting in cost and<br />

service benefits. Also, it is clear that innovation brought from 3PLs can be an element of<br />

outsourcing collaboration influencing on whole supply chain market position. Innovations<br />

such as RFID, picking by voice are the sort of solutions that customers are looking for to<br />

enhance their operations.<br />

At last, communication should be pointed as a key ingredient for ensuing a good<br />

relationship between provider and customer. Communication is the responsibility of both<br />

parties in the relationship, and to ensure good level of communication they both need to<br />

provide channels for this to happen. Regular meetings provide a forum to discuss business<br />

changes and its impact on needs and priorities, it is also the best time to understand<br />

customer vision.<br />

Summary<br />

To achieve a success in outsourcing relationships in every logistics functions including<br />

reverse logistics, the customer expectation should be properly aligned with the 3PL business<br />

model and relationships structure. The customer expectations focuses mainly on: superior<br />

service and execution, trust, openness and information sharing, solution innovation, ongoing<br />

executive level support. The Capgemni study (Langley and Capgemini 2005) showed that,<br />

although relations between outsourcing partners are satisfactory, there is still much to be<br />

done and that both parties desire a more collaborative and strategic relationship. One of the<br />

reason this has not happened is that customers see the issue as the 3PLs’ responsibility, and<br />

vice versa. In truth of course it takes two parties to really work hard to make any form of<br />

relationship work.<br />

References<br />

Bowman R. J.: In managing outsourced relationships, there are no simple solution. Global Logistics and<br />

Supply Chain Strategies, July 2006<br />

Capgemini and Langley C.: Logistics Outsourcing is an Important Driver of Topline Growth and Corporate<br />

Strategy, According to New Global Study. FedEx, Philadelphia 2004


Grabara, J., et al., Business Relations in Reverse Logistics, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 99-107) 107<br />

Duck O., Schotz S., Gospodarka materiałowa. Poradnik praktyczny, Wyd. Alfa-Weka, Warsaw 1998<br />

Grubic J.: Leveraging logistics outsourcing relationships. http://logistics.about.com/library/uc040303a.htm<br />

Kot S., Slusarczyk B., , Process Simulation In Supply Chain Using Logware Software, Annales<br />

Universitatis Apulensis Series Oeconomica, 2009, Vol. 2, Issue 11<br />

Langley J., and Capgemini: 2005 Third-Party Logistics, Results and Findings of the 10 Annual Study,<br />

Capgemini 2005<br />

Michałek M.: Nie tylko koszty, czyli co trzeba wziąć pod uwagę przy podejmowaniu decyzji o<br />

outsourcingu, [in:] Gospodarka Materiałowa i Logistyka no. 11/2005<br />

Murphy J.V.: Finding value In mature outsourcing relationships, Global Logistics and Supply Chain<br />

Strategies, June 2005<br />

Rydzkowski W., Usługi logistyczne, Instytut Logistyki i Magazynowania, Poznań 2004.<br />

Schary, T.Skjott-Larsen P.B., Zarządzanie globalnym łańcuchem podaż, Wyd. PWN Warsaw 2002<br />

Skowron-Grabowska B.: Position of Logistics Centers in Reverse Supply Chains. [in:] Enterprise,<br />

Logistics and Innovations in Knowledge Based Economy. Ed.by Maria Nowicka-Skowron & Ralph<br />

Lescroart, Haute Ecole “Blaise Pascal”, Arlon 2008<br />

Szczepaniak T., Transport i spedycja w handlu zagranicznym, PWE, Warsaw 2002.<br />

Transport Intelligence 2006. Global Supply Chain Intelligence Portal. www.transportintelligence.com<br />

Waters D.(ed.): Global logistics. New Directions in Supply Chain Management. Kogan Page, London and<br />

Philadelphia 2007<br />

Article history:<br />

Received: 6 January 2010<br />

Accepted: 25 February 2010


ORIGINAL SCIENTIFIC PAPER<br />

Social Aspects in Buyer-Supplier Relationships of SMEs<br />

in Hungary<br />

Gubik Andrea, University of Miskolc, Institute of Economic Theory, Hungary<br />

UDC: 658.11(439) JEL: P43; P31; N84<br />

ABSTARCT – Cooperation among companies was brought to the focus of attention by the fast<br />

changes of economic circumstances and the role it can play in coping with risk, appreciating all those<br />

characteristics which can help fast reactions and adaptability, like faith among business partners and<br />

long run relationships. The entrepreneur him/herself has a great influence on the characteristics of<br />

cooperation as well, besides these processes pushing them to the direction of cooperation, whose<br />

intention to get involved depends on his/her skills, abilities, but such characteristics of the company<br />

like scale, fields of activities affect it too. Economic, social and cultural circumstances are of major<br />

importance too, among which the above mentioned factors pursues their effects. Cooperation among<br />

companies can happen on any fields of the firms’ activities, for example research and development,<br />

marketing, purchase, or trading. This present paper intends to introduce the reader to the<br />

characteristics of supplier-purchaser relationships of small- and medium sized enterprises, based on an<br />

empirical research’s experiences. According to our opinion, we can draw conclusions on the intention<br />

to cooperate concerning the nature of the buyer-supplier relationships of companies, so a wide range of<br />

information can be concluded on small- and medium sized enterprises’ partnerships.<br />

KEY WORDS: supplier-purchaser relationships, SMEs, Hungary<br />

Introduction<br />

Small- and medium sized enterprises receive more and more attention these days all over<br />

the world considering their economic, and their social importance. Economic processes and<br />

their fluctuations caused an increase in the uncertainty of economic decisions and<br />

appreciated flexibility on all fields of companies’ management. The ever stronger<br />

competition and permanent change in circumstances forces the actors of the economy to<br />

renew themselves from time to time, to search for new methods and new solutions to their<br />

problems. Networking and the evolution of a broad scale of international relations among<br />

companies can be regarded as one of these innovative solutions.<br />

Partnerships have always been playing an important role in the lives of the majority of<br />

the small- and medium sized enterprises, mainly because of the limited nature of their<br />

resources. But uncertainty accompanying changes and the requirement of enhanced<br />

flexibility brought about major changes both in the quality of company cooperation and in<br />

the circle of the participants.<br />

The evolution and development of Hungarian small- and medium sized enterprises<br />

shows major differences from the international trends. This specialty is explained by several<br />

factors by the authors (for example by historical traditions, and by socialisation inheritance


Gubik, A., Social Aspects in Buyers-Supplier Relationships, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 108-116) 109<br />

of loose business faith, by the lack of in heritage effect, by the valuable nature of political<br />

relationships and their economic effects, etc.) (See for example: Róbert 1999, Román 2007,<br />

Kuczi 1998, Czakó et al. 1995, Gábor 1997.). Hungary’s small-and medium sized enterprises<br />

show resemblance to neither the development process based on economic logic characteristic<br />

for the Western part of Europe, nor with the SME sector of Asian countries which is based on<br />

social traditions. Its evolution and development can be regarded as an organic process as its<br />

major fragment had evolved based on obligations after the changing of the Regime. On the<br />

other hand social traditions had not played major role in its development. All these factors<br />

determine the operation, attitudes and practice of the actors of the Hungarian SME sector.<br />

All these specialities are of major importance even if Hungarian SME sector does not<br />

show major differences concerning statistical data from other European countries. This is the<br />

reason why we will have to be careful in using the results of international researches (for<br />

example Observatory of European SMEs, 2003). This is even more important in case of the<br />

data of the North-Hungarian Region.<br />

Our research intends to fill in this gap, searching the answer for the question what type of<br />

work distribution specialties can be observed in the chosen circle of the small-and medium<br />

sized enterprises on the one hand, while on the other hand what kind of characteristic<br />

differences can be found compared to international surveys. Based on these researches we<br />

intend to answer the important question of whether the analysed circle of Hungarian<br />

entrepreneur had already managed to form real cooperation or not.<br />

Methodology<br />

In my empirical work I used the questionnaire accomplished in the framework of the<br />

FKFP 0015/2002. education and research project. The data basis constructed based on the<br />

results of the survey contains representative data according to employee number and field of<br />

activity of 217 small- and medium sized enterprises of Borsod-Abaúj-Zemplén county (10-<br />

249 employees). Furthermore, 16 micro enterprises’ (1-9 employees) answers were also used,<br />

but only case of the questions concerning the subjective opinions of entrepreneurs about<br />

tendencies. In case of these questions I always guided the attention to treat these results with<br />

precaution. The county’s structure of SMEs concerning the scale of enterprises shows major<br />

differences from neither national nor European statistics. If analysing only enterprises<br />

employing more than 10 people the distribution of small-and medium sized enterprises is 80-<br />

20 percent.<br />

For the analyses of the data I used SPSS 14.0 software package. I analysed the sample by<br />

descriptive statistics, multi-variable analyses, cluster-, factor analyses and by correlation<br />

showing the strength of stochastic relationship among variables.<br />

In order to able to draw general conclusions based my sample I paid special attention to<br />

the structure of my sample. I used the layered sample technique belonging to the group of<br />

random samples. The reliability of the sample was 95 percent, the sampling error ± 6,16<br />

percent. During the analysis I used pair wise method when treating missing values, I only<br />

used the full answers in case any questions. In my research I considered 0,05 significance<br />

level to be relevant and gave the probability values by the distinct questions if they differed.


110<br />

Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 108-116)<br />

The situation of Borsod-Abaúj Zemplén County<br />

In this paper we would like to demonstrate the county’s situation only by laying some<br />

data, given the limited framework of this paper. The per capita GDP is 1355 thousands HUF,<br />

which is 67 per cent of the national average (KSH, 2006a). The same fallback is perceptible in<br />

investments, where the county’s per capita performance is 70.3 per cent of the national<br />

average (KSH, 2006a). The county shows underdevelopment in terms of the economic<br />

organisation’s statistics as well. Low enterprising willingness implies unfavourable economic<br />

situation as well. 4.8 per cent of the country’s registered organisation can be found in the<br />

county, about 63 thousands, which are enterprises in almost 90 per cent of the cases. This<br />

statistic proves that enterprising here is far below the national average. The number of<br />

enterprises vested for a thousand inhabitant is 77 while the national average is 120 (KSH,<br />

2006a). It partly contradicts the GEM’s subsequent survey, as according to it the Northern-<br />

Hungarian region is the 4-5th in the region’s hierarchy in terms of enterprising activity.<br />

According to the authors the better data can be the sign of convergence, in which motorwaybuilding<br />

can act as a catalyser. (Szerb, Varga, 2004). In terms of research-expansion,<br />

performance is below the national average again. (KSH, 2005a, 2005b).<br />

Unfavourable economic situation reflects in the social indices as well. The unemployment<br />

rate was 11.7 per cent in the first quarter of 2006, whilst the national average is 7.7 per cent.<br />

We can find further unfavourable social tendencies while analysing emigration and<br />

polarization.<br />

Results of the empirical research<br />

In the course of the research the cooperation declared by companies (when the company<br />

filling in the questionnaire declared involvement in cooperation) and latent cooperation were<br />

treated separately. In this paper we focus on this latter. (The question was the following: Are<br />

you involved in any types of cooperation beyond buyer-supplier relationships (cooperation:<br />

long run partnership among independent small- and medium sized enterprises which aims<br />

to achieve some kind of common goal going beyond a distinct action, a one-time<br />

transaction.)<br />

Latent cooperation was analyzed by the characteristics of buyer-supplier relationships, their<br />

share, geographical distance and the time-horizon of the relationship. Companies had to give<br />

the characteristics of their three most important buyer and supplier.<br />

Literature emphasizes the advantages of long run cooperation, because of the routines<br />

and the evolution of mutual faith, by which companies can realize economic benefits. A<br />

possible benefit of this kind can be the ever decreasing cost of processes.<br />

According to our work hypothesis rational companies will form permanent partnerships as<br />

strategic decisions within a relatively narrow geographical area.<br />

In order to be able to test this hypothesis we asked the companies about their three most<br />

important partners.<br />

The average share of the most important purchaser is higher than 50 percent, but we face<br />

a high level of standard deviation (St dev=27,9). The most important supplier’s share is<br />

slightly beyond this, it is 48,3 percent (St dev=25,2). A weak but significant relationship can<br />

be found between the shares of purchasers and suppliers (p=0,01, Pearson Correlation=0,302)


Gubik, A., Social Aspects in Buyers-Supplier Relationships, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 108-116) 111<br />

which mean that the concentrated nature of purchaser and supplier relationships are<br />

interrelated, companies with a concentrated circle of purchasers tend to have more<br />

concentrated supplier relationships.<br />

After analysing the share of the most important partners, the length of the surveyed<br />

companies’ buyer-subcontractor relationships was analyzed.<br />

Table 1. The average length of buyer relationships according to type of the buyer and size of the<br />

company<br />

Size Type of the buyer Average (year) N Standard Deviation<br />

Consumer 10,10 31 5,31<br />

Small and medium sized<br />

10,33 12 6,41<br />

enterprise<br />

10-19<br />

Large enterprise 7,95 19 4,74<br />

Local government 7,50 2 3,54<br />

Total 9,42 64 5,33<br />

Consumer 13,58 12 4,38<br />

Small and medium sized<br />

8,13 23 3,92<br />

enterprise<br />

20-49<br />

Large enterprise 9,14 21 5,15<br />

Local government 12,67 3 2,52<br />

Total 9,83 59 4,85<br />

Consumer 23,25 8 19,73<br />

Small and medium sized<br />

9,71 7 4,64<br />

enterprise<br />

50-249<br />

Large enterprise 10,64 14 5,56<br />

Local government 9,00 2 1,41<br />

Total 13,58 31 11,94<br />

When analysing the length of partnerships it can be concluded that the average length of<br />

relationship with the most important buyer is over 10 years (St.dev=7,059). Partnerships<br />

among companies and their suppliers also last for almost 10 years on average (St.dev=6,04).<br />

The analysis of buyer-supplier relationships of companies is made more difficult by the<br />

fact that companies’ chances to survive differ according to their size, so the average age of<br />

the groups of companies also differ. So the average age of partnerships increases with the<br />

increase of the scale of companies.<br />

That’s’ why we introduced a new variable by filtering the age of companies to decide the<br />

permanent nature of these relationships by measuring the length of the relationships as a<br />

share (%) of the companies’ age.<br />

The variable expresses the faith of buyers to the company and the company’s loyalty to<br />

its suppliers.<br />

Length of the partnership as<br />

a share of the companies’ age<br />

=<br />

Time period of the partnership (year)<br />

Age of the company (year)


112<br />

Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 108-116)<br />

The average value of the permanency index is 0.783 in case of the most important buyers,<br />

while 0.72 in case of suppliers which shows that companies’ relationships can be regarded to<br />

be stable.<br />

It can be concluded based on these tests that there is a connection between the permanent<br />

natures of the surveyed companies’ relationships: if a company decides to be involved in a<br />

permanent relationship, it is more likely to act so in all of its partnerships (p=0,000, the most<br />

important and second important buyer’s Pearson Correlations 0,721; the most important and<br />

second important supplier’s Pearson Correlations 0,657). This means companies tend to<br />

harvest the additional gains of cooperation as strategic decisions.<br />

After this the buyer-supplier relationships were analysed according to their geographical<br />

concentration. According to our working hypothesis there is a connection between the size of<br />

companies and the geographical concentration of their relationships and the geographical<br />

concentration and the permanent nature of cooperation.<br />

Local markets are generally very important for the surveyed companies. The smaller the<br />

size of a company is, the more likely it is to be connected to the local environment, to the<br />

local market, because of its limited resources and the characteristics of its purchasers. It was<br />

cleared that personal contacts and human factors generally are decisive in respect of the<br />

cooperation’s success. That is why they play a major role in forming permanent cooperation.<br />

When analyzing the partnerships from the geographic point of view it can be concluded<br />

that there is a statistically significant relationship between the geographical distance and the<br />

size of the company involved in cooperation (p=0,01, Eta 0,341). That means, that the smaller<br />

the company is, the more like its partnerships are concentrated. These are demonstrated by<br />

the following figures.<br />

Figure 1. Geographical concentration of suppliers according to the size of the company<br />

100%<br />

80%<br />

60%<br />

40%<br />

20%<br />

0%<br />

10-19 20-49 50-249<br />

Same region Other Hungarian region Foreign


Gubik, A., Social Aspects in Buyers-Supplier Relationships, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 108-116) 113<br />

Figure 2.Geographical concentration of buyers according to the size of the company<br />

100%<br />

80%<br />

60%<br />

40%<br />

20%<br />

0%<br />

10-19 20-49 50-249<br />

Same region Other Hungarian region Foreign<br />

The further extent of cooperation proved to be matched with the more permanent nature<br />

of relationships.<br />

On the other hand, both the characteristics of activities and their types are decisive in the<br />

aspect of geographical situation of the partners (p=0,000, Cramer’s V=0,259). Buyers of<br />

companies in the fields of merchandise and services are more concentrated geographically;<br />

more distant partnerships and international activity are rather characteristic for industrial<br />

companies. The main connections are shown on figure 3.<br />

About 90 percent of the partners of companies supplying directly consumers or local<br />

governments can be found in the same region the firm is situated in. Buyers of those who sell<br />

to small- and medium sized or large enterprises are less concentrated, but even in their case,<br />

partners pursuing their activities in the same region play a major role (63,7 and 49,3 percent).<br />

Figure 3. Geographical concentrations of buyers according to the affiliation and field of<br />

activities of the buyers<br />

100%<br />

90%<br />

80%<br />

70%<br />

60%<br />

50%<br />

40%<br />

30%<br />

20%<br />

10%<br />

0%<br />

Consumer<br />

SME<br />

Large enterprise<br />

Local government<br />

Same region Other Hungarian region Foreign<br />

100%<br />

90%<br />

80%<br />

70%<br />

60%<br />

50%<br />

40%<br />

30%<br />

20%<br />

10%<br />

0%<br />

Industry<br />

Trade<br />

Services<br />

Same region Other Hungarian region Foreign<br />

Suppliers’ geographical positions differ both according to the type of supplier and the<br />

field of activity. Suppliers of small enterprises can usually be found in the same region where


114<br />

Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 108-116)<br />

the company is situated in. With the increase of the supplier company’s size the probability<br />

of having more distant partners increases too (p= 0,000, Cramer’s V= 0,304). This context is<br />

shown on figure 4.<br />

Inter-regional relationships of both industrial and service sector firms are over-average<br />

important (56,5 and 59 percent). In case of services major differences can be found according<br />

to branches of services pursued (transportation and financial activities are less concentrated).<br />

Figure 4. Geographical concentrations of suppliers according to the affiliation and field of<br />

activities of the companies<br />

100%<br />

100%<br />

80%<br />

80%<br />

60%<br />

60%<br />

40%<br />

40%<br />

20%<br />

20%<br />

0%<br />

Small enterptise<br />

Medium sized enterprise<br />

Large enterprise<br />

Same region Other Hungarian region Foreign<br />

0%<br />

Industry<br />

Trade<br />

Services<br />

Same region Other Hungarian region Foreign<br />

The time-horizon of the surveyed companies’ buyer-supplier relationships and the<br />

geographical concentration was analysed separately. The stochastic relationship between the<br />

permanent nature of relationships (the length of the partnership as a share of the companies’<br />

age) and the geographical location of the buyer-subcontractor was tested.<br />

Based on the edification of the sample the more close partners are situated to each-other<br />

(the buyer and its supplier), the more lengthy their relationship will be. We can conclude<br />

that personal relationships favour the length of partnerships and human factors of<br />

cooperation can be decisive for its success.<br />

Table 2. The average length of buyer relationships according to the geographical location of buyers<br />

Geographical location of buyers Average (year) N Standard Deviation<br />

Same seat as the company 12,41 32 4,655<br />

In 50 km round of the company 9,93 41 8,878<br />

Same region 9,46 37 4,959<br />

Other Hungarian region 9,24 33 3,873<br />

EU member state 9,29 14 5,797<br />

Other country 3,00 3 1,732<br />

Total 9,99 160 6,144<br />

High values of deviation warn us that the sample is not homogenous, so the context was<br />

analysed distributing buyers to types as well. According to the type of purchaser small- and<br />

medium sized enterprises show a significant, while large enterprises show no significant<br />

relationship between the geographical position and the length of the partnership, which


Gubik, A., Social Aspects in Buyers-Supplier Relationships, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 108-116) 115<br />

means that in case of large companies, purchaser partners’ geographical distance does not<br />

play an important role in the permanent nature of the relationship.<br />

The permanency of the partnership (percentage form) and the geographical position of<br />

the purchaser also show the same context, geographical closeness of the purchaser increases<br />

with the permanency of the partnership (p=0,02, Éta2=0,117).<br />

The above mentioned observations concerning the cooperation among companies shed light<br />

on the contradiction of the time-horizon and geographical aspects of partnerships.<br />

The geographical concentration of partnerships is beneficial for the companies involved<br />

as it contributes to the permanent nature of relationships on the one hand, giving additional<br />

economic advantages for the companies, but on the other hand, concentration denies the<br />

requirement of economic rationality as it causes the company to be dependent on the<br />

economic fluctuations of its close environment.<br />

Summary<br />

Interrelation can be found between the permanent nature of the surveyed companies<br />

most important partnerships: if a company forms permanent relationship on any fields of its<br />

activity, it will try do act so in all of its partnerships. Companies tend to harvest the<br />

additional advantages of cooperation by making strategic decisions. Permanent partnerships<br />

are usually made within a relatively narrow geographic region and as the concentration of<br />

partnerships increases so will increase the time-horizon of the relationships as well.<br />

Permanent and geographically concentrated partnerships of small- and medium sized<br />

enterprises contribute to harvesting the additional advantages of cooperation while on the<br />

other hand make them more dependent on their economic environment. Economic<br />

rationality appears in a paradox way in this case.<br />

This is why rationally behaving companies have to find the balance between forming<br />

economically beneficial permanent partnerships and bearing additional risk of geographical<br />

concentration.<br />

The survey of the county was a one time, cross section research, but we see the<br />

opportunity to broaden it to the North-Hungarian Region, with some adaptation of the<br />

questionnaire. This would enable us to make a regional comparison and moreover, to<br />

compare our results with the Observatory of European SMEs results on small- and medium<br />

sized enterprises.<br />

In the framework of the Laky Teréz Foundation’s grant an experts’ questionnaire will be<br />

accomplished in the course of which we would like to get to know the opinions of other<br />

parties (supporting institutions, authorities) too. The results of empirical researches will be<br />

controlled by this expert questionnaire and interviews will be made for the situation of<br />

small- and medium sized enterprises too, asking the representatives of institutions which<br />

influence small- and medium sized enterprises directly, or indirectly.<br />

Further qualitative research should be made, as the barriers of our research showed,<br />

which evolved from the complex nature of relationships among companies. This complexity<br />

of the system of relationships and the analysis of embeddedness requires qualitative<br />

methods to be used. Data standing at our disposal did not enable us to fully map all the


116<br />

Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 108-116)<br />

relationships between factors of partnerships, mainly in case of reasoning, so further efforts<br />

should be made to answer all questions.<br />

References<br />

Róbert, P. (1999): Kikből lettek vállalkozók? A vállalkozóvá válás meghatározó tényezői<br />

Magyarországon a kommunizmus előtt, alatt és után. Közgazdasági Szemle XLVI. évf. 403-427.<br />

oldal<br />

Román, Z. (2007): A vállalkozás a magyar gazdaságban – nemzetközi tükörben. Köz-Gazdaság 2007.<br />

II. évf. 2. pp. 67-84.<br />

Kuczi, T. (1998): Vállalkozói kultúra – az életutak finalitása. Replika 29. szám 1998.<br />

Czakó, Á., Kuczi, T., Lengyel, GY. Vajda, Á. (1995): A kisvállalkozások néhány jellemzője a 90-es évek<br />

elején. Közgazdasági Szemle, XLII. évf. 1995. 4. sz.<br />

Gábor, R. I. (1997): Belső versus foglalkozási munkaerőpiac – a posztszocialista átalakulás elhanyagolt<br />

dimenziója. Közgazdasági Szemle XLIV. évf. 457-473. oldal<br />

KSH (2006a): A gazdasági fejlődés regionális különbségei Magyarországon 2005-ben. Országos<br />

statisztika, Központi Statisztikai Hivatal Debreceni Igazgatósága<br />

KSH (2005a): Kutatás és fejlesztés 2004 Központi Statisztikai Hivatal<br />

KSH (2005b): Innováció 2003. Központi Statisztikai Hivatal<br />

Szerb, L., Varga, A. (2004): A vállalkozói aktivitás regionális és lakóhely szerinti különbségei<br />

Magyarországon 2004-ben. Megjelent: Vállalkozásindítás, vállalkozói hajlandóság és a vállalkozási<br />

környezeti tényezők alakulása Magyarországon a 2000-es évek első felében. Global<br />

Entrepreneurship Monitor, 2004 Pécs<br />

Observatory of European SMEs (2003/5): SMEs and Cooperation. KPMG Special Services and EIM<br />

Business & Policy Research in the Netherlands, European Network for SME Research, Intomart<br />

Luxembourg.<br />

Article history:<br />

Received: 8 January 2010<br />

Accepted: 1 March 2010


ORIGINAL SCIENTIFIC PAPER<br />

Competition in Banking Market in Slovakia<br />

Střelecká Zdenka * , Ekonomická univerzita v Bratislave, Národohospodárska fakulta,<br />

Bratislava, Slovakia<br />

UDC: 336.7 (437.6) JEL: G21; N24<br />

ABSTARCT – The process of fundamental changes of Slovak banking sector has had essential<br />

influence on the concentration and on the character of banking products. The article is oriented on<br />

analysing the competition level using Herfindahl index and CR3 and CR5 indexes. Indeces are used to<br />

compare the level of competition using following balance items: total assets, bank loans and deposits to<br />

corporate and retail sector. This approach brings us different conclusions.<br />

KEY WORDS: competition, banking sector in Slovakia, Herfindahl index, CR3, CR5, balance<br />

sheet<br />

Introduction<br />

Competition is a basic component of a well-functioning market mechanism. It is a rivalry<br />

between individuals or economic groups with their differentiated interests and goals. In<br />

general, we recognize competition on the supply or demand side, price or non-price and<br />

perfect or imperfect competition. Imperfect competition is further characterized as<br />

monopolistic competition, oligopoly and monopoly. Information about the level of<br />

concentration is important not just for the evaluation of market structure, but they help in<br />

the process of creating recommendation for concrete measures of monetary policy.<br />

Because of its special position it is important to determine the level of the competition in<br />

the banking market. Firstly, it is because banking market belongs to the markets with high<br />

and strict regulation. Supervision on the banking sector is carried out by specialized<br />

departments of the Ministries of Finance, separate offices or central banks. In Slovakia, the<br />

supervision is operated by National Bank of Slovakia (NBS). Secondly, entry in the market is<br />

a subject to several restrictions. For example the management has to be qualified enough; it<br />

has to obtain a banking license from the supervisor and has to own a sufficient level of<br />

capital. Furthermore, during their activity commercial banks have to meet the requirements<br />

of domestic supervisor and the minimum capital requirements known as Basel II. On the<br />

other hand it is known that banks undertake high risk and their actions affect the overall<br />

development of the economy. That is the main reason why the banking sector is a subject to a<br />

higher degree of regulation than other sectors are. In the past the importance of healthy<br />

functioning of the banking sector forced the governments in many countries to undergo<br />

restructuring process of banking sectors to avoid the negative impact on the entire sector and<br />

on the whole economy.<br />

*<br />

E-mail: zdenka.strelecka@gmail.com


118<br />

Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 117-125)<br />

The bank is exposed to risks on both sides of its balance sheet. On the asset side it runs the<br />

market and credit risk (counterparty default risk). On the liabilities side there is a risk of<br />

availability of the bank´s funds and their time restriction.<br />

Measures of competition<br />

Frequently and easily used way how to determine the concentration in a particular sector<br />

are concentration ratios, the Herfindahl index and Hirshman index. With these indices it is<br />

possible to determine the level of market concentration; the higher the concentration is the<br />

weaker market competition will be.<br />

Recent studies dealing with the competition in the banking market use a Boone indicator,<br />

which is based on the opposite approach - the more efficient bank is the greater market share<br />

of competitive market it gains. In some cases, especially when comparing banking markets<br />

with various sizes, the Boone indicator appears as a more appropriate and flexible variable.<br />

Concentration ratio is designed as a sum of variable rk which represents market share of<br />

the i th largest firm.<br />

Herfindahl index (some sources refer to Herfindahl-Hirschman Index, HHI index) is<br />

based on the theory of industrial organization of Harvard School. This theory deals with the<br />

relationship between the industry structure – conducting the business - and its performance<br />

(so-called SCP paradigm “Structure - Conduct – Performance”). Highly concentrated<br />

structure is associated with monopolistic behaviour (Tokárová Mária, Rievajová Eva (2007)).<br />

It is defined as the sum of the squares of market shares of all firms. Index takes into account<br />

the number of firms in the industry and their market share. Analytical transcript of<br />

Herfindahl index (Kočišová Kristína (2008, p. 20)) is as follows:<br />

h - real function of n variables<br />

n - number of firms in the industry<br />

qk - the value of the variable for the i th firm, k = 1, ..., n<br />

Q – the value of the variable for the industry<br />

rk – the market share of the company in the industry converted in the percentage<br />

By definition of the U.S. Department of Justice, the market is considered as highly<br />

concentrated if the HHI exceeds 1800 1 . If the value is below 1000 the market is considered as<br />

not concentrated. When the value of the index is close to zero it is a symbol of a competitive<br />

environment without a dominant player. If all firms in the market have equal market share,<br />

then inverse value of the index represents the number of firms performing on the market.<br />

1<br />

[cit. 2009/12/31] http://www.justice.gov/atr/public/testimony/hhi.htm


Střelecká, Z., Competition in Banking Market in Slovakia, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 117-125) 119<br />

Modified version of HHI index is a Hirschman Index, the analytical entry is defined as<br />

follows:<br />

The index can take values [0.1]. Low value of Hirschman index shows highly competitive<br />

environment, by contrast, value close or equal to 1 indicates maximal concentration<br />

(Kočišová (2008, p. 21)).<br />

These indicators have one disadvantage. They do not distinguish between large and<br />

small countries. The fact that the concentration may occur as a result of a natural competition<br />

when the effective company eliminates its market rivals is also ignored.<br />

Competition in the Slovak banking market<br />

As a measure of the competition in the Slovak banking market National Bank of Slovakia<br />

uses three indices: CR3, CR5 indeces and the HHI index. For comparison, Czech national<br />

bank uses different measure and that is a Lerner index.<br />

• CR3 index is defined as the share of the three banks with the highest volume of<br />

the variable on total volume of the variable in the banking sector; only institutions<br />

with the positive value of the variable are included in calculation<br />

• Analogically CR5 presents the share of five banks with the highest volume of the<br />

variable on the total volume of the variable in the banking sector; only institutions<br />

with the positive value of the variable are included in calculation<br />

• Herfindahl Index (HHI) is defined as the sum of the squares of individual banksʹ<br />

share on the total volume of the variable, expressed in percentage; only<br />

institutions with the positive value of the variable are included in calculation.<br />

The following chart shows the evolution of all three indices since the year 2005 till the<br />

second quarter of 2009 using the total assets as a variable. Looking at the development of the<br />

HHI index it is best to see that level of competition does not stagnate and during the period<br />

2005 - 2Q 2009 several changes in various indicators occurred. Increase in the value of the<br />

HHI index means an increase in market concentration (and vice versa the reduction of<br />

competition). In the year 2005 HHI index reached the value 1084 and in the second quarter of<br />

2009 the value of the 1220. Although the values are within the zone of moderate market<br />

concentration, it should be noted that since the year 2005 there has been a substantial<br />

increase of the concentration ratios in the banking market.<br />

During the years 2006, 2008 and during the second half of 2009 CR3 indicator and the<br />

HHI index reached the highest values. The share of five largest banks (CR5) on total assets<br />

more or less copied the development. The exception is the year 2006 when there was a<br />

decline in the share of the five largest banks and increase in the share of three largest banks.<br />

We could say that during this year three largest banks reinforced their leading market<br />

position. Looking on the decrease of CR3 and HHI parameters between 2005 and 2007 thus<br />

caused an increase in competition. In the same time variable CR5 had an opposite<br />

development. The share of five largest banks on total assets increased at the expense of the


120<br />

Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 117-125)<br />

share of three largest banks, which can be defined as a positive development. The highest<br />

degree of concentration was observed at the end of 2008, which was due to the big amount of<br />

cash deposits from population. The reason for cash deposits was a euro adoption and<br />

conversion of Slovak crowns to euro currency. Later on commercial banks imposed these<br />

funds through the deposit facility in the NBS. In comparison with the study of European<br />

central bank the average value of CR5 indicator for 25 European countries is 72% (European<br />

central bank (2005)).<br />

Chart 1. Development of the HHI index, CR3 and CR5 indeces on the total assets market 2<br />

Analyzing the values of indices for different sectors (retail and corporate) and for each<br />

balance sheet item (client´s credits and client´s deposits) it allows us to observe in which<br />

sector the concentration reaches the highest level. The values of individual variables are<br />

shown in the following two tables. The first table is an analysis of market concentration for<br />

credits to corporate and retail sector. The second table monitors developments on the deposit<br />

market. (CR3 R – CR3 indicator for retail sector, CR3 C – CR3 indicator for corporate sector,<br />

CR 5 R – CR5 indicator for retail sector, CR5 C – CR5 indicator for corporate sector, HHI R –<br />

HHI index for retail sector, HHI C – HHI index for corporate sector)<br />

Table 1. CR3, CR5 a HHI index values on the loan market 1<br />

credits CR3 R CR3 C CR5 R CR5 C HHI R HHI C<br />

2005 64% 40% 81% 58% 1610 907<br />

2006 63% 43% 81% 63% 1588 981<br />

2007 61% 48% 82% 68% 1587 1088<br />

2008 63% 47% 82% 67% 1607 1096<br />

2009Q1 64% 47% 82% 67% 1618 1096<br />

2009Q2 64% 47% 83% 67% 1639 1088<br />

2<br />

[cit. 2009/12/1] http://www.nbs.sk


Střelecká, Z., Competition in Banking Market in Slovakia, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 117-125) 121<br />

Table 2. CR3, CR5 a HHI index values on the deposit market 3<br />

deposits CR3 R CR3 C CR5 R CR5 C HHI R HHI C<br />

2005 61% 52% 75% 68% 1612 1314<br />

2006 62% 53% 76% 69% 1636 1344<br />

2007 63% 55% 75% 74% 1625 1480<br />

2008 64% 58% 76% 75% 1614 1485<br />

2009Q1 63% 56% 75% 74% 1580 1459<br />

2009Q2 63% 56% 75% 74% 1567 1503<br />

Using individual balance sheet items instead of total assets demonstrate us higher values<br />

of concentration indices. Values for deposit market differ at most. In comparison with the<br />

value of the HHI index for total assets they vary approximately from 300 to 500 points.<br />

Competition in the credit market developed in different way. Compared with the<br />

analysis of total assets, the values of the HHI index in the retail sector are higher by 400 to<br />

500 points and in the corporate sector are even below around 200 points. The concentration<br />

on the credit market for the retail sector is substantially higher than the concentration for the<br />

corporate sector. Similar development can also be seen on the deposit market even though<br />

there is not so high disparity.<br />

Chart 2. HHI index for loans and deposits to retail and corporate sector 2<br />

The values of the HHI index for retail sector on both markets reached the value around<br />

1600 (see Chart 2). This level of concentration indicates that a low level of competition<br />

dominated in this sector. It should be noted that the market with the HHI index value of 1800<br />

is considered as a highly concentrated.<br />

In the corporate sector, the situation on the market with deposits and loans is different. A<br />

high level of competition dominates on the credit market. The values of the HHI index in<br />

deposit market for corporate sector are catching up with the index values in deposit market<br />

for retail sector. This is a sign of lower competition than on the credit market.<br />

3<br />

[cit. 2009/12/1] http://www.nbs.sk


122<br />

Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 117-125)<br />

Chart 3. CR3 and CR5 indeces on credit market 4<br />

The development of the CR3 and CR5 indeces for credit market gives us interesting<br />

conclusions. While the share of five largest banks for the retail sector changed over the<br />

period very slightly, in 2007 the proportion of three and five largest banks in the credit<br />

market for the corporate sector reached the highest level. An important and surprising fact is<br />

that the difference between the share of three largest banks in the retail sector and the share<br />

of five largest banks in the corporate sector is minimal. What once again is a demonstration<br />

of the low level of competition in the services for retail sector and the dominant position of<br />

the three largest banks.<br />

Until 2007 deposit market for retail sector had substantially higher concentration than the<br />

corporate sector. But since 2007 the share of five largest banks in both sectors is almost equal<br />

(the difference is 1 percentage point.). Although the share of three largest banks in the<br />

corporate sector is lower than in the retail sector, around 10%, there is a similar trend with<br />

the share of three largest banks in the retail sector. It should be noted that during the<br />

watched period in the retail sector minimal changes took place.<br />

Chart 4. CR3 and CR5 indeces for deposit market 3<br />

4<br />

[cit. 2009/12/1] http://www.nbs.sk


Střelecká, Z., Competition in Banking Market in Slovakia, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 117-125) 123<br />

An alternative method of determining the competition<br />

An alternative way how to determine the competitive environment is to compare the<br />

difference between the individual market shares of market players. Total assets are<br />

considered as an appropriate indicator for determining the market share. In the following<br />

section the share of assets of the i th bank on assets of total banking sector (MS i) is compared<br />

with the share of assets of j th bank on total assets of banking sector (MS j).<br />

Chart 5. Development of market shares (variable – total assets) 5<br />

The difference between the market share of bank with the strongest position (leding<br />

bank, MS 1) and bank with the second largest share (MS 2) reaches the highest value in 2006.<br />

Comparing the difference between the market shares of leading bank and bank with the<br />

third largest share (MS 3) a similar trend can be seen. The development of these indicators<br />

gives us interesting results. While during years 2004 - 2006 leading bank affirmed its position<br />

(see Chart 5), between years 2007 and 2008 lost this favourable position and what is<br />

interesting the difference between the leading bank and position of the second and the third<br />

bank decreased. In the future we can expect the exchange of the positions between bank with<br />

the second and third largest market share.<br />

If in the calculation of market shares is variable “total assets” replaced by balance sheet<br />

items: client´s credits or clientsʹ deposits, it would bring us interesting conclusions, too. The<br />

development on the deposit market is slightly different. Till 2006 there is a widening gap<br />

between the market shares of leading bank and the bank with the second highest market<br />

share. During the years 2006 and 2008 there is a reduction of this difference. On the contrary,<br />

the difference between leading bank and the bank with the third largest market share (MS 1 -<br />

MS 3) during years 2004 and 2008 decreased (Chart 7). Leadership on the market with<br />

deposits and with total assets belongs to the same bank.<br />

5<br />

Author´s calculations. [cit. 2009/12/1] http://www.nbs.sk/sk/statisticke-udaje/menova-abankovastatistika<br />

/menova-statistika-penaznych-financnych-institucii#AM1-12PF


124<br />

Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 117-125)<br />

Chart 6. Market shares (credits) 4 Chart 7. Market shares (deposits) 4<br />

The situation on credit market during the years 2004 and 2008 changed significantly. The<br />

bank with leading role in 2004 dropped to second place in 2005 and since 2006 it declined to<br />

third rung. The bank which won the leadership in 2005 remained at first place until 2007.<br />

In the following year the difference between MS 1 and MS 2 was minimal and the leading<br />

position was overtaken by the bank with the second largest market share of loans. These<br />

findings correspond with the development of the recent years. Due to the high economic<br />

growth we could observe easening of credit conditions and competitive fights between<br />

commercial banks.<br />

Analyzing the level of competition by using the market shares of 3 major banks brought<br />

us, especially for the credit market, opposed conclusions as the analysis of market<br />

concentration using the HHI index. While the HHI index (and also partly CR3 and CR5<br />

index) informed us about the stagnation or increase of market concentration, market share<br />

analysis demonstrated a highly competitive fight between commercial banks.<br />

Conclusion<br />

A general rule about countries with a small market is that they have a high degree of<br />

concentration. In Slovakia, more than 50% of banking sector assets is held by the three largest<br />

banks and approximately 70% is held by the five largest market players. Such a situation<br />

refers to a higher concentration, but compared with other ʺnewʺ EU countries we belong<br />

among the moderate above-average.<br />

Analysis of the market share of three largest banks has shown us competition and a<br />

decreasing position of the leading bank. On one hand, the situation in retail sector, where<br />

there is a permanently higher level of concentration than in the corporate sector, is caused by<br />

unconcerned consumers. On the other hand, the fact is that the three largest players on the<br />

banking market are banks with the longest history. Two of them operate on the Slovak<br />

market for more than 50 years and they inherited a number of clients from the previous<br />

socialist era, when bank did not need to fight for a client.


Střelecká, Z., Competition in Banking Market in Slovakia, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 117-125) 125<br />

Recently, the situation has changed dramatically. Except for the entry of few new players<br />

(most recently in November 2007), the Slovak banking sector was marked by the adoption of<br />

the euro and economic crisis. These two factors caused the decrease of profitability of the<br />

banking sector and both sides of the balance sheet were affected. One of the potential<br />

benefits of euro adoption should be an increase of competition but so far the development<br />

did not show such benefit. It will be questionable whether the future development will bring<br />

strengthening or weakening of the position of three biggest players.<br />

References<br />

European central bank. 2005. EU banking structures. Frankfurt am Main: European central bank.<br />

Kočišová, Kristína. 2008. “Konkurencia na slovenskom bankovom trhu”. Biatec, 16/2008 (10): 20-25<br />

Tokárová, Mária, and Rievajová, Eva. 2007. “Inovácie vo vývoji prístupov k teóriám konkurencie,<br />

súťaživosti, resp. protimonopolnej politiky.” http://semafor.euke.sk/zbornik2007/pdf/tokarova<br />

_rievajova2.pdf<br />

Article history:<br />

Received: 13 January 2010<br />

Accepted: 14 March 2010


SCIENTIFIC REVIEW<br />

Innovation Policy Based on Network Paradigm<br />

Pachura Piotr * , Czestochowa University of Technology, The Management Faculty,<br />

Czestochowa, Poland<br />

UDC: 330.354 JEL: 031<br />

ABSTARCT – The aim of this paper is to present the role of cluster and network collaboration in<br />

innovativeness process and knowledge based economy. The paper describes the clustering pagadigm in<br />

EU policy and examples of the network creating process and organizing cluster initiatives in EU<br />

countries.<br />

According to the results of literary research it is possible to univocally state that the<br />

geographical proximity between enterprises of a similar profile of activity facilitates the<br />

achievement of a higher level of productivity and innovativeness. The clusters covering the<br />

spatial sphere of its location: producers, suppliers, service providers, research units,<br />

educational institutions and other units supporting a given sector became an important<br />

factor in the economic development of regions. The trend towards interaction and basing on<br />

the resources of business partners operating in a given location results from the new trends<br />

of management, among others, the school of resources in strategic management at the top<br />

with key competences and the open innovation paradigm.<br />

Directing the regional policies of the EU along the concept of clusters also results from<br />

the wide impact of the progressing globalization on the essence of inter-regional<br />

competitiveness as well as regional cohesion (Matlovič R., Matlovičová K. 2008). Increasingly<br />

lower costs of transport and communication and the simultaneous liberalization of<br />

international trade revealed the weaknesses of regional economies and exposed them to<br />

global competition. With regard to the increasing number of locations with attractive<br />

conditions for investment, European regions faced the necessity of offering foreign investors<br />

even more unique benefits. Clusters became in this situation a magnet attracting a bunch of<br />

highly specialized resources of knowledge in a given sector which are not present in other<br />

locations.<br />

Therefore, due to its practical application, the concept of the theoretical clusters<br />

regardless of whether the work of M. Porter or as a stage in the evolution of industrial<br />

districts of Marshall in the direction of the systems of innovation became one of the most<br />

important elements of economic, innovative and regional policies of the EU. The reasons for<br />

such a turnaround in the activities of the European Commission have been previously<br />

indicated. It is possible to add that the traditional instruments of supporting economic<br />

growth and the competitiveness of regions, for instance by supporting whole branches of the<br />

industrial sector, have not succeeded and had to be replaced by a mechanism that is more<br />

adjusted to the challenges of the global economy.<br />

*<br />

Address: Armii Krajowej 19B, 42-200 Czestochowa, Poland, e-mail: ppachura@zim.pcz.pl


Pachura, P., Innovation Policy Based on Network Paradigm, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 126-133) 127<br />

The network approach to innovation and the according theory of clusters became the<br />

central point of interest for the EU. A key element in the policies of innovation of the EU<br />

became the cluster-based policy. This type of policy is defined as a grouping of activities and<br />

instruments used by the authorities at various levels for the improvement of the level of<br />

competitiveness of the economy by stimulating the development of the existing cluster<br />

systems or their creation at first and foremost the regional level (Brodnicki, Szultka, 2004).<br />

Among the elements that decide on the effectiveness of policies of supporting clusters the<br />

following assumptions can be listed (EDA, 1997):<br />

• The driving strength of the cluster policy is the free market;<br />

• This combines various units of the regional economy;<br />

• This is based on cooperation and mutual activity;<br />

• This takes the form of a strategic nature and helps to shape a common vision;<br />

• This creates new value.<br />

Involvement in initiating policies based on clusters can be naturally explained by the<br />

determination of EU member countries in the realization of the aims of the Lisbon Strategy<br />

whose achievement at the first deadline turned out to be impossible. Clusters seem to be the<br />

appropriate direction for the realization of the innovative policies of the EU. From the point<br />

of view of the European Commission, promoting policies based on clusters is to lead to the<br />

achievement of the aims of the Lisbon Strategy. The competing conglomeration of<br />

enterprises provides the possibility of access to the network filled with skills and abilities to<br />

generate innovation. They are becoming an effective environment in which it is easier to<br />

realize the initiation of new products immediately after their development in research<br />

laboratories.<br />

A policy based on clusters is not a separate element of activities on the part of national<br />

and regional authorities, but should be rather treated as an integral element of various<br />

policies. This is most frequently reflected in the assumptions of scientific policy or scientific<br />

and technological, innovative, economic, and regional development. In this way the idea of<br />

clusters penetrates into the strategy of development for regions, but is also taken into<br />

account in state programmes that are financed by the EU structural funds. Most often<br />

however, the philosophy of policies based on clusters takes on a horizontal nature and finds<br />

itself in all the afore-mentioned policies. It fits in perfectly into the policies of regional<br />

development based on the model of the innovation system. Clusters as a way of arousing the<br />

innovativeness of regions usually find themselves among the priorities of regional strategies<br />

of innovation. The cluster policy is part of the model of strengthening interactions within the<br />

framework of the so-called triple helix, or in other words, the system of interactions between<br />

the key players of the system of innovation: enteprises, scientific and research units and local<br />

authorities.<br />

The concept of clusters became a topic of interest for national and regional governments,<br />

organizations of entrepreneurs, international organizations particularly OECD countries and<br />

the EU in the second half of the 1990s. This interest can be observed through successive<br />

cluster initiatives, starting from the theoretical work explaining the essence of clusters to the<br />

attempts of working out the methodology of their identification and finally the guiding rules<br />

in the sphere of the policies of stimulating clusters in regions. These last initiatives are worth


128<br />

Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 126-133)<br />

devoting more time to in order to illustrate the factors of success in undertaking activities<br />

within the framework of regional policies on behalf of the development of clusters, which<br />

has been done in the later stages of this paper. The guiding rules of the programme and the<br />

strategic documents of the EU took account of the concept of clusters relatively late as it<br />

occurred at the beginning of this century but it is necessary to explain this as a rather<br />

different approach to the issue of the innovativeness of regions. The efforts in this area were<br />

from the very beginning directed towards the issue of the systems of innovation, industrial<br />

districts and local innovative environments, which in their own essence are also based on the<br />

network paradigm of innovativeness.<br />

Apart from the initiation of the afore-mentioned models of regional development,<br />

another trend of activity in the EU associated with clusters was the creation of networks of<br />

interaction between regions. The stimulation of networks of interaction appears in various<br />

aspects and policies of the EU. The scientific and research policies can be used here as an<br />

example together with its main instrument in the form of the Framework Programmes that<br />

support the networks of interaction of scientific centres and their relations with industry. In<br />

the middle of the 1990s, the EU started to place particular emphasis on the issue of regional<br />

innovativeness. The breakthrough moment was the passing of the Lisbon Declaration by the<br />

European Council in 2000 and the acceptance of the aim of transforming the EU economy in<br />

the most competitive market based on knowledge in the world. In this context the policy of<br />

supporting clusters in EU member countries grew in importance and the regional authorities<br />

acknowledged that the foundation of competitiveness is that of small enterprises. The<br />

creation of an environment that is friendly towards the development of small firms became a<br />

priority, particularly through the stimulation of interaction between them and also creating<br />

interaction with the R&D sector. The strategy of development for EU member countries<br />

initiated with the aid of programmes financed by EU funds that were assigned priorities in<br />

the sphere of supporting networks of interaction at the level of enterprises and the area of<br />

R&D. The network model of innovativeness was accepted as binding, in which the theory of<br />

clusters fits perfectly.<br />

The activity of the EU Commission in the area of creating a favourable regulatory<br />

framework and the popularization of knowledge on the topic of clusters is confirmed by<br />

many conceptual papers and documents among which the following can be mentioned:<br />

• “Industrial Policy in an Enlarged Europe” from 2002, in which the creation of<br />

innovative clusters became acknowledged as the key priority of the new<br />

industrial policy,<br />

• Communiqué entitled “Some Key Issues in Europe’s Competitiveness – Towards<br />

an Integrated Approach”, according to which one of the proposed activities was<br />

to be the European project of identifying the best practices in the sphere of of<br />

initiatives of developing clusters,<br />

• Programme document entitled “Industrial Policy in an Enlarged Europe” from<br />

2004, in which the innovative policies and supporting initiatives based on clusters<br />

were listed as being of key importance (Ślusarczyk B., 2008),<br />

• Consultation document entitled “Innovate for a competitive Europe”, which<br />

states that the structural funds can support the internationalization of regional


Pachura, P., Innovation Policy Based on Network Paradigm, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 126-133) 129<br />

clusters, which according to the European Commission became the effective<br />

mechanism of stimulating innovation.<br />

The policy of regional development based on clusters can be the effect of bottom-up<br />

initiatives, as well as resulting from top-down initiatives. The second type of operation is the<br />

effect of the activity of the local authorities, however the bottom-up activity is usually<br />

characterized by the activity of the branch environment. Regardless of the way of realization<br />

of the cluster initiatives, a significant role should be attributed to the public authorities.<br />

According to M. Porter, the role of the public factor in creating and stimulating the<br />

development of the cluster in the area of shaping the factors of production, related and<br />

supporting sectors, conditions of demand, as well as the strategy and rivalry between<br />

enterprises (Porter M. 2001).<br />

The first paper that carried out a complex analysis on the effects of policies based on<br />

clusters realized in selected countries is the document entitled “The Cluster Initiative<br />

Greenbook”. In this document the results of research into cluster initiatives were presented<br />

within the dimension of their effectiveness and range. Interesting results were also presented<br />

within the framework of a range of OECD projects (OECD 2001) directed at the analysis of<br />

practical aspects of the functioning of clusters. The afore-mentioned projects were aimed at<br />

diagnosing the existing state in the area of cluster initiatives, as well as working out the<br />

guiding principles in the area of formulating and initiating innovative policies based on<br />

networks. A compendium of knowledge and a type of guidebook on the topic of shaping<br />

policies based on clusters is constituted by the work prepared by the non-governmental<br />

organization IKED (International Organization for Knowledge Economy and Enterprise<br />

Development) (Anderson 2004). In the identification of the recommendations and factors of<br />

success in the realization of cluster initiatives the report prepared at the request of the<br />

Ministry of Trade and Industry of Great Britain was also used (A Practical Guide...) .<br />

On the basis of the afore-mentioned documents it is possible to indicate the experience of<br />

particular countries in the area of initiating policies based on clusters. The results of research<br />

facilitate the creation of the basic recommendations for the practical formulation and<br />

initiation of the policies of regional development based on the concept of clusters.<br />

Cluster initiatives most frequently appear in highly developed countries, mainly in the<br />

sectors of large technological intensities with regard to the following: IT,<br />

telecommunications, medical equipment, production technology, pharmaceuticals,<br />

automotive. Most initiatives were directed at the development of a specific cluster and were<br />

started between the years 1999 – 2002. The aims of creating cluster initiatives are very varied<br />

and can be classified within the framework of the following 6 categories: research and the<br />

creation of network interactions, education and training, innovation and technology,<br />

expansion of cluster, political activity, commercial interaction. Within the framework of the<br />

distinguished categories of aims, most participants of clusters (over 75%) indicate the main<br />

aims of their participation in cluster initiatives as follows: the creation of interaction between<br />

enterprises and creating relations between people, development of their own company,<br />

easier access to new technologies and the ability to create innovation. Initiatives that have a<br />

priority goal in promoting innovation and new technology achieve significantly greater<br />

success in the area of improving the competitiveness of particular enterprises.


130<br />

Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 126-133)<br />

The process of creating and organizing cluster initiatives takes on different forms despite<br />

the fact that the nature of such initiatives enforces the principles of creating a partnership<br />

between the industrial sector, research and public authorities. The participation of particular<br />

parties is varied in individual cases. The idea of constructing a cluster is most frequently<br />

becoming an initiative of local authorities and the sector of enterprises at a more or less equal<br />

pace. A decidedly greater role in the aspect of financing cluster projects is played by public<br />

authorities. In over half of the clusters analysed, the main source of financing was the<br />

regional budget or national public units. In turn, the involvement of colleges in initiating<br />

clusters in their initial phase of development was very small, which clearly confirms the low<br />

financing coming from these units. A dominating role in managing clusters is played by the<br />

sector of enterprises, while the role of public authorities in some decisions is also envisaged.<br />

The involvement of local authorities, most often in the form of neutral organizational units,<br />

is to lead to the balancing of interests of the competing enterprises. The source of financing<br />

does not seem to have great significance in achieving results both in the aspect of<br />

competitiveness as well as the numbers of members of a cluster.<br />

According to the theory of clustering, most initiatives are directed in their own sphere in<br />

a given industrial branch or geographical zone. Most existing clusters include units that are<br />

located within a radius of one hour’s drive. The aspect of geographical distances was<br />

indicated as a significant factor in facilitating mutual personal contact. Clusters are not<br />

limited to the type of enterprises which can become its member. Both direct competitors and<br />

foreign business units can freely participate in the aforesaid initiatives. The only restriction<br />

in this regard refers to one level in the value chain, which means for instance a greater role in<br />

including specific producers but not their suppliers and clients.<br />

The fundamentality of initiating policies based on clusters is becoming univocally<br />

confirmed by the benefits indicated which are provided to enterprises in these types of<br />

initiatives. Entrepreneurs identify the success resulting from the membership of a cluster<br />

through the prism of competitiveness and achievement of business goals. Most<br />

entrepreneurs confirm that the initiatives led to the improvement of their competitiveness<br />

and the most frequent effect is the tightening of interaction between the industrial sector and<br />

the R&D area. The factors that are decisive in the success of clusters include the following:<br />

the quality of the business environment, structure and way of running economic policies, as<br />

well as the internal strength of the cluster itself. Within the framework of the first category<br />

two key factors should be listed which attract other firms to participate in the cluster<br />

initiative to the highest degree: the presence of an advanced scientific society and a high<br />

level of trust between firms, while also the public and private sectors. Economic policy is also<br />

significant with such elements as: promotion of scientific research and innovation, the<br />

possibility of taking economic decisions at a regional level, protection of the high level of<br />

market competition. The trend of achieving better results in the area of competitiveness is<br />

visible through cluster initiatives directed at strong clusters. Clusters with a significant<br />

economic meaning on the scale of the whole region or country and a longer history of<br />

existence are more attractive for new members. They usually attract the presence of<br />

enterprises that compete on an international scale.<br />

Within the framework of research presented in the Green Book a range of factors was<br />

diagnosed that are decisive to the failure of cluster initiatives. The greatest significance is


Pachura, P., Innovation Policy Based on Network Paradigm, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 126-133) 131<br />

attributed to the lack of consensus in the area of taking action, as well as a clearly formulated<br />

vision for the initiatives and undefined aims of a quantifiable nature. Significant meaning in<br />

the failure of initiatives is played by the issue of insufficient resources, both in infrastructure<br />

and financing. Other elements that lead to unsatisfactory results are as follows: restriction of<br />

the range of membership to only groups of large enterprises, one level in the value chain or<br />

enterprises belonging to the location dictated. Large significance in the failure of cluster<br />

initiatives is also played by a lack of trust in the initiatives undertaken by public authorities.<br />

A survey of the reports prepared up to now on the topic of cluster initiatives in various<br />

countries enables us to note that the policy of supporting clusters takes on various forms. In<br />

reality it does not only vary from the level of analysis accepted and the methodology applied<br />

in supporting the process of networking, but also the degree in which the policy based on<br />

clusters was initiated, as well as the instruments used for this purpose.<br />

The most frequent elements in the strategies of the development of clusters include:<br />

• Strong competiveness of the economy and the reforms of economic policy in the<br />

area of market regulations,<br />

• Supplying strategic information by way of foresight type projects, cluster analysis<br />

and internet portals,<br />

• Agencies dealing in contacts with entrepreneurs and units supporting<br />

innovativeness e.g. innovation centres;<br />

• Development programmes for the development of clusters financed by public<br />

funds;<br />

• Establishment of centres of excellence connecting the industrial sector with the<br />

R&D area;<br />

• Adhering to public procurement (public tenders);<br />

• Construction of platform for public and private dialogue.<br />

In many countries the process of clustering was initiated by the establishment of<br />

allowances, platform and regular meetings involving enterprises and organizations from the<br />

business environment associated with a given branch. The motive for starting dialogue was<br />

the results of research projects, particularly the technological foresight, which aroused<br />

discussion and prompted joint action. Generally speaking, the process of initiating clusters<br />

and other networks of interaction in a dimension of European regions takes on various forms<br />

depending on the political culture, way of institutionalizing the dialogue between the public<br />

sphere and the private sector, the size of the regional economy, but also depends on the scale<br />

of intervention of public authorities in economic life, as well as the degree of industrial and<br />

technological specialization of the region.<br />

In the afore-mentioned reports and expert analysis a set of key recommendations in the<br />

area of initiating policies based on clusters indicates the factors of success listed below<br />

(IBNGR, 2002):<br />

• The main role should be accepted by the sector of enterprises, however public<br />

authorities take on the role of a catalyst in the development of the cluster in<br />

question. In such an arrangement, the expansion of the public and private sector<br />

partnership is key,<br />

• The aims of the initiated policies should be transparent and measurable,


132<br />

Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 126-133)<br />

• Clusters should be built on the basis of existing potential and avoid creating<br />

initiatives in branches which are not sufficiently developed or generally do not<br />

appear in a given location,<br />

• The presence of a large enterprise in a given branch which is seen positively as a<br />

source of new technologies, acquisition of expertise, client base and suppliers, as<br />

well as space for the development of human resources,<br />

• Adequate technical infrastructure is essential together with a developed network<br />

of transportation and telecommunication connections, as well as an accessible<br />

base of attractive real estate for investors. Institutional mechanisms are helpful<br />

here in the form of entrepreneurial incubators, scientific, technological and<br />

industrial centres, due to the conditions of mutual work in a specified physical<br />

space offered by them;<br />

• The presence of an entrepreneurial spirit, especially among employees of a<br />

scientific and research unit and large innovative enterprises which is to lead to the<br />

formation of spin-off and spin-out firms;<br />

• The possibilities of access to financial capital in the form of high risk capital<br />

(venture capital), networks of investors searching for innovative and prospering<br />

enterprises (the so-called business angels), loan funds and finally public<br />

programmes, finance programmes e.g. EU funds;<br />

• The development strategy of a cluster should be realized at an appropriate level of<br />

local government which facilitates the effective initiation,<br />

• In the initial phase of development of a cluster an analysis of the potential or<br />

existing concentration of enterprises of a given branch should be analysed making<br />

use of the existing clusters in other locations. The results of this analysis should be<br />

used for public debate with the aim of working out a wide social consensus,<br />

• The action taken should enable the increase in the specialization of cooperating<br />

enterprises and institutions with the aim of realizing economies of scale and<br />

range, division of labour, as well as development on a local scale of specialized<br />

factors of production which facilitates the strengthening of the competitive<br />

position of the cluster,<br />

• Using the benefits accruing from the geographical proximity should be promoted<br />

by the establishment of associations of sub-suppliers or other forms of mutual<br />

interaction (e.g. associations of mutual credit guarantees) stimulating diffusion of<br />

knowledge and technology, as well as the processes of mutual learning,<br />

• In the case of highly technological clusters, one of the fundamental activities<br />

should be acknowledged as stimulating and creating flexible interactions at the<br />

level of industry and the academic sector,<br />

• For the achievement of success, it is essential to build clusters on the basis of<br />

formal and informal networks of interaction within which the information flows<br />

can take place. This type of social network that emerged on the basis of a high<br />

level of trust and social capital can be stimulated by strong institutional structures<br />

divided by cultural values and common goals;


Pachura, P., Innovation Policy Based on Network Paradigm, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 126-133) 133<br />

• The market success of a cluster is conditioned by the access to the base of skills<br />

understood as the highly skilled workforce;<br />

• Mechanisms should be created that enable resignation from cluster initiatives in<br />

the case of their failure.<br />

In summing up, the results of the analysis of the conditioning of the initiated innovative<br />

policy directed at clusters, it should be first and foremost underlined that the key aim of this<br />

policy should be to strive towards the creation of a long lasting competitive advantage in the<br />

economy of the region. The way for achieving the afore-mentioned aim can become a strong<br />

innovative cluster or group of smaller innovative clusters functioning within the framework<br />

of a coherent system of innovation. The policy based on clusters should be supported by a<br />

set of other complementary actions within the framework of related policies, which leads to<br />

the gaining of synergy effects. This is therefore the policy which penetrates into other<br />

policies and in its own essence takes on a nature of horizontal activities. The concept of<br />

clusters is according to other models of development for innovative regions and should be<br />

treated in this way as a supplement for the models of the learning regions, regional systems<br />

of innovation and the innovative environment. All the afore-mentioned theories of regional<br />

development are based on the network paradigm of innovation and enable local spatial<br />

arrangements to meet the challenges of the global knowledge economy.<br />

References<br />

A Practical Guide to Cluster Development, Department of Trade and Industry, DTI, London<br />

Andersson T., et al., The Cluster Policies Whitebook, IKED, 2004<br />

Boosting Innovation. The Cluster Approach, OECD, 1999<br />

Brodnicki T., Szultka S., Tamowicz P., Polityka wspierania klastrów. Najlepsze praktyki. Rekomendacje dla<br />

Polski, Niebieskie Księgi, Rekomendacje (Policy of supporting clusters.Best practices.<br />

Recommendations for Poland) No. 11, IBNGR, Gdańsk 2004<br />

Cluster Based Economic Development: A Key to Regional Competitiveness, EDA, 1997<br />

Innovative Clusters. Drivers of National Innovation Systems, OECD, 2001<br />

Matlovič, R., Matlovičová K., Regionálne disparity a regionálny rozvoj na Slovensku s osobitným zreteľom na<br />

Prešovský kraj. [In:] E. Rydz, A. Kowalak (eds.), Świadomość ekologiczna a rozwój regionalny w<br />

Europie Środkowo-wschodniej. Wydawnictwo Naukowe Akademii Pomorskiej, Słupsk, 2008<br />

Porter M., Porter o konkurencji, PWE, Warszawa 2001<br />

Ślusarczyk B., The EU Adjustments in the Sphere of Industrial Policy [in:] microCAD 2008. International<br />

<strong>Scientific</strong> Conference. Economic Challenges. Miskolc 2008<br />

Article history:<br />

Received: 18 January 2010<br />

Accepted: 22 April 2010


SCIENTIFIC REVIEW<br />

Foreign Direct Investment and Global Economic Crisis<br />

Ślusarczyk Beata * , Czestochowa University of Technology, The Management Faculty,<br />

Czestochowa, Poland<br />

UDC: 339.727.22 JEL: 016<br />

ABSTARCT – In the article author defines globalization its features and effects. Furthermore, it<br />

presents the characteristics of foreign direct investment with its crucial role in the process of<br />

globalization and development of national economies. Then author discuss the reasons of the latest<br />

world economic crisis and its dissemination all over the world. In the light of economic crisis the<br />

article presents the role played by foreign direct investment in global economy. Author also presents<br />

changes in the juxtaposition of top sources and influx countries of foreign direct investment. Finally,<br />

author considerate government actions accelerating influx of foreign direct investment.<br />

Globalization of world economy and foreign direct investments<br />

Contemporary world economy is completely different from the economy of twenty or<br />

thirty years ago. One of the most important differences is the intensification of the process of<br />

globalization. This trend results in the widening influence of international capital on national<br />

economies and the changing characteristics of company operation. The location of<br />

production plants, research and development, as well as other activities of companies more<br />

and more often becomes independent of the existing national borders. (Buiter, Lago, Stern<br />

1997; Nowicka-Skowron, Kot 2003)<br />

Globalization is not a new phenomenon; it was a long time ago that people and<br />

corporations began to engage in long distance trading. What is more, for thousands of years<br />

people have invested into economic enterprise in foreign countries. Actually, the waves of<br />

globalization observed nowadays are very similar to those observed in the past. However,<br />

the politics and technological development of the last several decades has caused an<br />

extraordinarily accelerated development of foreign trade, cross border investments and<br />

migration of population in comparison to what was observed in the past. For instance, since<br />

1950 the value of world trade has increased twenty times, and the value of foreign<br />

investments between the years 1997 and 1999 nearly doubled, increasing from $468 billion to<br />

$827 billion. Having these facts in mind, Thomas Friedman summarized the present wave of<br />

globalization with the words “further, faster, cheaper and deeper.” (Friedman 2002)<br />

Globalization is defined in a variety of ways. According to A. Szymański, “the process of<br />

globalization refers to the increase in free flow of capital, goods and production factors<br />

among countries. Thus, it is a gradual disappearance of economic borders and a sharp<br />

quality improvement in the mobility of production factors.” (Szymański 2001)<br />

*<br />

Armii Krajowej 19B, 42-200 Czestochowa, Poland, e-mail: jagoda@zim.pcz.czest.pl


Ślusarczyk, B., FDI and Global Economic Crisis, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 134-141) 135<br />

G. Gierszewska and B. Wawrzyniak define globalization as “the process of changing the<br />

national perspective from which one views the rules and regulations of conduct, occurrences,<br />

behavior, activity, and principles held, into a global perspective [translation mine].”<br />

(Gierszewska, Wawrzyniak 2001)<br />

Globalization can be defined as the process of interaction and integration among people,<br />

enterprises and governments of various countries, a process shaped by international trade<br />

and supported by information technology, and influencing the environment, culture,<br />

political systems, economic development, and the quality of life of societies all over the<br />

world. (www.globalisation101.org)<br />

Regardless of a definition of and an approach to the phenomenon of globalization (e.g.<br />

J.A. Scholte describes it as a five-dimensional phenomenon (Scholte 2005)) it can be proved<br />

that globalization functions within two main spheres: economic and social one. The first of<br />

these comprises finance, technology (in connection with research and development as well as<br />

the knowledge-based economy), market and market strategies (especially competition). As<br />

for the social sphere, it comprises culture, lifestyle, consumption models, management, legal<br />

regulations, and also political concepts. (Pakulska, Poniatowska-Jaksch 2008)<br />

On the other hand, A. Zorska points out the following characteristic features of<br />

globalization (Zorska 2007):<br />

• in the sphere of foreign direct investments (FDI) there have occurred the changes<br />

in the structure of their branches and geography, and all over the world there has<br />

been recorded an increase of their share in general gross investment expenditure<br />

with reference to fixed assets;<br />

• the expansion of the process of globalization is possible due to an intensity of<br />

international connections within branches and sectors of industry, etc.;<br />

• the range of forms of steady cooperation between companies is widening (joint<br />

venture, strategic alliances) in all value chain links and the partnership enterprises<br />

in the international market;<br />

• the number and significance of transnational corporations is growing in the<br />

economic structures of the world, entailing the change of relations between the<br />

state and the corporations (more and more often corporations influence the<br />

decisions of governments in particular countries).<br />

These are the foreign direct investments that play a crucial role in the process of<br />

globalization, at the same time supporting the development of national economies. The flow<br />

of capital in the shape of FDI facilitates an access to technologies, know-how and<br />

management skills, accelerating the integration of national economies with international<br />

markets, production and distribution networks, and strengthening the international<br />

competition of companies and whole national economies (UNCTAD 2002).<br />

Foreign direct investment (FDI) is the most advanced way of entering foreign markets,<br />

being an international transfer of capital in order to open an affiliated company in another<br />

country and exercise control over it. First of all, FDI is about capital investments, but also<br />

about intra-company re-invested profits and loans. The word “direct” indicates that the<br />

foreign investor has an influence over the activity of a company abroad. This fact differs FDI


136<br />

Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 134-141)<br />

from a portfolio investment, which does not make it possible to influence the activities of<br />

companies abroad. (Pakulska, Poniatowska-Jaksch 2004)<br />

Foreign direct investment is a type of investment which entails long-term relationships<br />

and continuous involvement and control of an entity which has its headquarters in one of the<br />

national economies towards another entity, which has its headquarters in another country. In<br />

the case of FDI the investor can directly influence the management of a company in another<br />

country. The invested capital amounting to 10% of shares constitutes a defining feature of a<br />

FDI (UNCTAD 2004, Kot 2006).<br />

Foreign direct investment is not only a simple transfer of financial capital aiming solely at<br />

making profit within the framework of the global company strategy. It is more accurate to<br />

say that the financial capital constitutes an instrument which renders it possible to transfer<br />

across borders a set of production factors in order to exploit them in a more effective manner,<br />

and also facilitates making a better use of competitive advantage in the foreign market. Thus,<br />

apart from the transfer of capital, there takes place also the transfer of technology,<br />

knowledge, management methods and the marketing.<br />

There can be distinguished two basic forms of foreign direct investment: (Krzak 2005)<br />

• greenfield investments (independently starting new operational facilities from the<br />

ground up);<br />

• brownfield investments (taking over an already existing company and<br />

restructuring it, or a cooperation with a local partner in the form of a joint venture<br />

enterprise).<br />

Greenfield investments are characteristic of developing countries and consist in a foreign<br />

investor building new facilities from the ground up in the host country. Each country looks<br />

forward to greenfield investments, since this type of investments entails increasing<br />

production assets and creating new jobs (assuming that the national competition is not<br />

eliminated in this way). (Krzak 2005) On the other hand, brownfield investments in the<br />

shape of mergers and takeovers are a dominating form of investment in developed countries<br />

and usually take place when the controlling interest in one business entity is acquired by<br />

another business entity, or when two entities, situated in two different countries, agree to<br />

join their activities. If the invested capital is utilized to purchase the already existing assets,<br />

there follows modernization and more rational organization of work.<br />

Foreign direct investment at the time of global economic crisis<br />

The still growing economic, financial and social interdependencies which result from<br />

globalization have twofold consequences. On the one hand, these consequences are positive:<br />

influx of foreign capital, scientific and technological development, expansion of potential<br />

customers’ market, increasing effectiveness of economic activities, investment boom, and<br />

economic growth. On the other hand, a disadvantage of globalization is the fact that national<br />

economies become very sensitive to economic fluctuations in geographically distant regions.<br />

This is especially noticeable in the sphere of finance. The present world economic crisis has<br />

its roots in the subprime mortgage loans. Over the years of economic boom, the<br />

intermediaries responsible for organizing mortgage loans, given the incentive of high<br />

commissions, persuaded the people with small loans to accept mortgage loans with low


Ślusarczyk, B., FDI and Global Economic Crisis, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 134-141) 137<br />

upfront fee or no upfront fee, and without checking out the loans. A serious crisis in the field<br />

of subprime mortgage loans started in July 2007, with the bankruptcy of two hedge funds<br />

(making their profit on small disparities in the exchange rate of various currencies) of the<br />

American investment bank Bear Stearns (The Economic Times, 2008). The world economic<br />

market has undergone considerable change since 2007, when the continuous noninflationary<br />

growth took place. As was forecast, the year 2008 proved that the crisis was<br />

endangering not only American economy, but world economy as well. (Sachs 2008) Towards<br />

the end of summer 2008 it seemed that the influence exercised by growing prices of energy<br />

would be diminished and the slumping economy was on its way to recovery. However, the<br />

autumn of 2008 brought a series of various interdependent upheavals. The improvement in<br />

housing economy triggered off credit crunch and continuous drop of stability in the financial<br />

market, combined with the threat of increasing inflation, dramatic fluctuations in the price of<br />

petroleum, and raising prices of goods accelerated by the weakening of American dollar. The<br />

results of all these factors became even more severe with a sudden rise in food prices<br />

(Committee on Economic… 2008). Between September 2008 and March 2009 the economy<br />

was receding at the pace of 5.5%. Financial institutions lost trillions of dollars, euros and<br />

French franks. Financial liquidity of a majority of institutions became threatened and the<br />

stock exchanges suffered severe drops. Central banks provided the support of hundreds of<br />

trillions worth, and the scope of their intervention was not limited to supporting markets but<br />

also included preventing the bankruptcy of individual institutions.<br />

According to the forecasts of a majority of economists, the crisis had to influence mainly<br />

“ripe” economies, such as the ones found in western Europe, since they were tightly<br />

connected financially with the USA. However, in reality the crisis has made an impact on the<br />

whole world. (Jahnson 2008)<br />

One of the results of the crisis in the mortgage market in 2007 in the USA was the<br />

unprecedented influx of investment funds into developing markets and markets which were<br />

undergoing a transformation. In September 2007, the funds investing money in the frontier<br />

markets gathered 15.7 billion dollars net from the investors. This was the largest sum in the<br />

history of this type of investment. Between early September and 25th October 2007, the funds<br />

in question gathered nearly 34 billion dollars, i.e. more than during the whole 2005 and 2006.<br />

(Jóźwik 2007) Therefore, it can be concluded that in 2007 there already took place another<br />

increase in portfolio investments. The funds which attract the most money of the investors<br />

are especially those which invest in Asia, Latin America, and specialize in BRIC countries<br />

(Brazil, Russia, India, China), and are global emerging funds.<br />

The year 2006, when the tendency for growth was observed, was actually the third year<br />

in a row of the increase in foreign direct investment, the situation being a worldwide<br />

phenomenon (UNCTAD 2007). In 2006, the considerable influx of foreign direct investment<br />

(FDI) amounted to USD 1.3 trillion, which meant the increase by another 38% in comparison<br />

with 27% in 2004 and 29% in 2005, as well as reaching the level close to that observed in 2000,<br />

when the record value of 1.3 trillion dollars was set up for FDI. The influx of FDI was<br />

noticeable in all major subregions: in developed countries, developing countries, and in<br />

countries undergoing transformations, i.e. in southeastern Europe and in the<br />

Commonwealth of Independent States. The growth tendency discussed above has been<br />

present throughout the last 26 years. However after uninterrupted growth in FDI activity in


138<br />

Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 134-141)<br />

the period 2003–2007, global FDI inflows fell by 14% in 2008 to $1,697 billion, from a record<br />

high of $1,979 billion in 2007 (see Figure 1).<br />

Figure 1. FDI influx worldwide and in particular groups of economies, 1980-2008 (bln USD)<br />

2000<br />

1800<br />

1600<br />

1400<br />

1200<br />

Developing economies<br />

Developed economies<br />

Transition economies<br />

1000<br />

800<br />

600<br />

400<br />

200<br />

0<br />

1980<br />

1982<br />

1984<br />

1986<br />

1988<br />

1990<br />

1992<br />

1994<br />

1996<br />

1998<br />

2000<br />

2002<br />

2004<br />

2006<br />

2008<br />

Source: Author’s elaboration based on UNCTAD FDI/TNC database<br />

FDI flows fell further as the financial crisis entered a tumultuous new phase in September<br />

2008 following the collapse of Lehman Brothers (one of the largest financial institutions in<br />

the United States), and as major developed economies fell into, or approached, economic<br />

recession. In contrast, developing and transition economies saw FDI inflows rise in 2008 to<br />

record levels for both.<br />

Worldwide foreign investment reached the value of USD 12 trillion; the type of<br />

investment in question was made mainly by transnational corporations (TNC). The group of<br />

transnational corporations comprised about 82 000 parent companies and 810 000 foreign<br />

affiliate companies. (WIR 2009) According to business forecasting, the turnover, value added<br />

and export of the TNC in 2006 increased by 18%, 16% and 12% respectively. While the influx<br />

of FDI into developed countries increased by 45% and reached the value of USD 857 bln, the<br />

influx into developing countries amounted to USD 379 bln (21% increase), and the influx into<br />

economies undergoing a transformation amounted to USD 69 bln (68% increase), reaching<br />

the highest level in history. However, the international stature of TNC has not insulated<br />

them from the worst global recession in a generation. The 4.8% reduction in inward FDI<br />

stock worldwide was reflected in the decline in value of gross product, sales and assets, as<br />

well as employment of TNCs’ foreign affiliates in 2008, a marked contrast to huge doubledigit<br />

growth rates in 2006 and 2007.<br />

The United States regained the leading position with reference to the influx of foreign<br />

direct investment, leaving behind Great Britain and France. Among developing countries


Ślusarczyk, B., FDI and Global Economic Crisis, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 134-141) 139<br />

and the countries whose economies were undergoing a transformation, nearly all regions<br />

noticed a considerable increase in the influx of FDI in 2006. Only in Oceania, South America<br />

and the South African Republic there was an outflow of FDI. In the group of developing<br />

countries the influence of FDI was the most significant in China, Hong Kong (China) and<br />

Singapore. As for the economies undergoing a transformation, the largest influx of FDI was<br />

observed in Russia.<br />

Developed countries still remained the major source of investments (84% of all<br />

investments made). In 2006, the largest exporter of foreign direct investments were the<br />

United States (USD 217 bln). The USA was followed by the EU countries, i.e. France (USD<br />

115 bln), Spain (USD 90 bln) and Great Britain (USD 79 bln). The role played by developing<br />

economies and economies undergoing a transformation as a source of foreign direct<br />

investment was still growing. In the group of developing economies, the most important part<br />

was played by Hong Kong (China), with USD 43 bln, and in the group of economies<br />

undergoing a transformation the most important role was played by Russia, with USD 18<br />

bln. The value of foreign direct investments flowing out of these two groups of countries<br />

amounted to USD 193 bln, i.e. 16% of the overall world outflow of FDI. United States stayed<br />

still on the top FDI source country all over the world after crisis effects dissemination but<br />

there are changes on next places of the juxtaposition of top sources of FDI outflows. There<br />

are France, Germany, Japan and then United Kingdom as a main FDI sources (see Figure 2).<br />

Figure 2. Developed countries: top 10 sources of FDI outflows 2007-2008 (bln USD)<br />

Netherlands<br />

Belgium<br />

29<br />

58<br />

68<br />

94<br />

2007<br />

Spain<br />

77<br />

96<br />

2008<br />

Canada<br />

Switzerland<br />

50<br />

60<br />

78<br />

86<br />

United Kingdom<br />

111<br />

275<br />

Japan<br />

74<br />

128<br />

Germany<br />

156<br />

180<br />

France<br />

225<br />

220<br />

United States<br />

312<br />

378<br />

0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400<br />

Source: Author’s elaboration based on UNCTAD FDI/TNC database


140<br />

Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 134-141)<br />

Conclusions<br />

Governments actions are very important in FDI acceleration, it is especially important in<br />

case of crisis. The governments implemented measures accelerating the influx of FDI during<br />

2006 and at the beginning of 2007, however, at this time in some sectors of industry,<br />

especially those of “strategic” significance, there were introduced new restrictions with<br />

reference to takeover of assets by foreigners, or such measures which assured a larger share<br />

of governments in the profits. Such tendencies were observed especially in mining industry.<br />

In 2006 there were made the total of 147 government decisions making a given country more<br />

FDI-friendly, while the 37 government decisions were made to the contrary, in 2008, 110 new<br />

FDI-related measures were introduced, of which 85 were more favorable to FDI, compared<br />

to previous year, percentage of less favorable measures for FDI remained unchanged (WIR<br />

2009). In 2008 and the first half of 2009, despite concerns about a possible rise in investment<br />

protectionism, the general trend in FDI policies remained one of greater openness, including<br />

lowering barriers to FDI and lowering corporate income taxes.<br />

References<br />

Buiter W., Lago R., Stern N.: Promoting an effective market economy in a changing world, [in:] Sabot R.,<br />

Szekely P. (eds): Development strategy and management of the market economy, Vol. 2, Clarendon<br />

Press/Oxford University Press, Oxford, 1997.<br />

Committee on Economic Affairs and Development Provisional Report “OECD and the World economy”<br />

July 11th, 2008.<br />

Development and globalization: facts and figures. United Nations, New York and Geneva 2004.<br />

Friedman T. L.: Longitudes and Attitudes. Exploring the World After September 11., Farrar, Straus and<br />

Giroux. New York 2002.<br />

Gierszewska G., Wawrzyniak B.: Globalizacja. Wyzwania dla zarządzania strategicznego, Poltext,<br />

Warszawa 2001.<br />

Jahnson P.: Americans should mount their blessings. Forbes, June 30, 2008.<br />

Jóźwik T.: Pieniądze płyną na rynki wschodzące, Forbes 12/2007.<br />

Kot S.: Global Trends in Foreign Direct Investment, [in:] Kościelniak H (ed): Processes of Capital Supply in<br />

Production Enterprises, Wyd. WZPCzęst Częstochowa 2006.<br />

Krzak M.: Źródła wzrostu. Forbes 12/2007.<br />

Nowicka-Skowron M., Kot S.: Logistic Aspects of the Economyʹs Globalization and Integration [in:] R.<br />

Borowiecki (ed): Management of Organizations During Economic Integration and Globalization, Wyd.<br />

AE Kraków, Warsaw-Cracow 2003.<br />

Pakulska T., Poniatowska-Jaksch M.: Korporacje transnarodowe a globalne pozyskiwanie zasobów, Oficyna<br />

Wydawnicza SGH, Warszawa 2009.<br />

Pakulska T., Poniatowska-Jaksch M.: Bezpośrednie inwestycje zagraniczne w Europie Środkowo-<br />

Wschodniej. Koncepcja kapitału zagranicznego w Polsce, Oficyna Wydawnicza SGH, Warszawa 2004,<br />

Sachs J.: Ameryka w końcu zapłaci swoje rachunki. Europa nr 14 (209), 2008.<br />

Scholte J.A., Globalization: a critical introduction, Palgrave Macmillan; 2Rev Ed edition 2005.<br />

Szymański A.: Globalizacja, wyzwania i zagrożenia, Difin, Warszawa 2001.<br />

The Development Dimension of Foreign Direct Investment: Policies to Enhance the Role of FDI, in the National<br />

and International Context – Policy Issues to Consider, United Nations Conference on Trade and<br />

Development, Washington DC, 23 September 2002.<br />

The Economic Times: Global financial crisis: The story so far. September 21, 2008.


Ślusarczyk, B., FDI and Global Economic Crisis, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 134-141) 141<br />

World Investment Report 2009, Transnational Corporations, Agricultural Production and Development.<br />

United Nations, New York and Geneva, 2009.<br />

www.globalisation101.org<br />

Zorska A., Korporacje transnarodowe. Przemiany, oddziaływania, wyzwania, PWE, Warszawa 2007.<br />

Article history:<br />

Received: 15 January 2010<br />

Accepted: 21 April 2010


REVIEW<br />

BOOK REVIEW<br />

INFLATION AND UNEMPLOYMENT<br />

by<br />

Bojan Dimitrijević<br />

There’s no book or a study guide in contemporary macroeconomic literature which don’t<br />

deal with a Phillips curve as analytical instrument that explains relation between<br />

unemployment rate and a rate of wage changes. The Phillips curve became obligatory part of<br />

macroeconomic theory, subject of numerous empirical examinations, theoretical discussions<br />

and controversies, conclusions and recommendations for concrete application in shaping<br />

economic policy. A modern version of Phillips curve in combination with IS - LM and AS –<br />

AD model indicates how inflation, unemployment, and GDP can be affected through<br />

monetary and fiscal policy, as well as managing aggregate demand and supply.<br />

The author’s objective is to show theoretical fundamentals of Phillips curve and Phillips-<br />

Okun’s model; to point out the place of this concept in leading theoretical schools – it’s<br />

genesis and numerous research related to it.<br />

The book consists of six chapters. In the first chapter, author deals with theoretical<br />

fundamentals and genesis of Phillips curve, as well as development phases of this concept.<br />

Intellectual influences and predecessors of Phillips concept are displayed. Furthermore, the<br />

original Phillips curve, Lipsey model and modification of this concept, Friedman – Phelps’<br />

hypothesis of natural rate of unemployment (NRU) and vertical Phillips curve in rational<br />

expectations theory.<br />

The second chapter displays Phillips-Okun’s model originated by synthesis of Phillips<br />

curve and Okun’s curve. Phillips-Okun’s model could be simply articulated as a relation<br />

between gross domestic product and rate of inflation. In this chapter author presents Okun’s<br />

law, associating Okun’s and Phillips curve and comparing economic policies and<br />

macroeconomic aggregates in the Phillips-Okun’s model and IS – LM model. At the end of<br />

chapter, author deals with theoretical aspects of inflation, it’s quantification and economic<br />

policies concerning this economic phenomenon. The third chapter presents comparative<br />

analysis of relevant schools of economic thought: Neoclassical, Keynesianism, Monetarism<br />

and Rational expectations school (RATEX); their basic postulates and relationship to labor<br />

market. Furthermore, it explains concept and characteristics of natural rate of unemployment<br />

(NRU) and non - accelerating inflation rate of unemployment (NAIRU).<br />

The fourth chapter is heterogeneous and presents numerous researches related to Phillips<br />

curve: labor market models and analysis of institutional factors on labor market, role and<br />

significance of syndicate, empirical research on behavior of Phillips curve in OECD<br />

countries, etc.


Lovre, I., et al., Book Review, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 142-143) 143<br />

In the fifth chapter author examines economic system of Yugoslavia, assessing empirical<br />

and theoretical research of inflation, unemployment and GDP in the period between 1956<br />

and 1990. Moreover, this chapter provides a review of economic literature which is dealing<br />

with Phillips and Okunʹs curve and an attempt of creating empirical foundations of these<br />

two theoretical concepts in Yugoslavian economic system.<br />

In the sixth chapter author is analyzing contemporary research of Phillips curve and its<br />

implementation in modern concepts of macroeconomics and economic policies. In this<br />

chapter following issues are elaborated: hysteresis as an answer of New Keynesianism,<br />

alternative hysteresis theories, relation between adaptive and rational expectations, Lucas<br />

supply function and Lucas critiques, implementation of Phillips curve in welfare economics<br />

and game theory, analysis of Phillips curve in developing and transition countries; with<br />

special interest in behavior of Phillips curve during stagflation period from 1980 to 2000.<br />

As a supplement to this book, author presents his empirical research about possibility of<br />

existence of Phillips curve in Yugoslavian economy in the period between 1982 to 1990.<br />

The book contains numerous contemporary methods, a number of charts and<br />

spreadsheets, and portrayal of basic relations of Phillips curve and macroeconomic models.<br />

Author used voluminous literature and a great number of empirical researches related to this<br />

topic. A vast number of statistical and econometrical methods, as well as comparative<br />

analyses of myriad scientific papers, theories and economic schools are employed.<br />

The author is trying to find an answer for the following basic question: Could Phillips<br />

curve be used as an economic tool in macroeconomic policy? By using relatively modest<br />

econometric methodology, he gets to the right conclusion that Phillips curve is not applicable<br />

in Yugoslavian economy and couldn’t be used as useful theoretical instrument in<br />

macroeconomic policy.<br />

The book is logically structured with valid conclusions. On the basis of presented<br />

analysis of Phillips curve, its reflection on contemporary economic schools, comparative<br />

analysis of leading theoretical schools – as well as analysis of labour market – it presents<br />

useful and current macroeconomic study guide for economists, academics, researchers,<br />

business people and students.<br />

Lovre Ivan, Perić Mladen<br />

University EDUCONS, Faculty for business economics, Sremska Kamenica


ECONOMIC ANALYSIS<br />

Price and Ordering<br />

Freqency: <strong>Twice</strong> a year (1 volume of 2 issues)<br />

For purchase of this journal, contact eaoffice@ien.bg.ac.rs<br />

Institutional price:<br />

EUR 50 for European countries<br />

US$ 70 for US, CANADA, Australia<br />

Student price:<br />

EUR 35 for European countries<br />

US $ 50 for US, CANADA, Australia<br />

Print copies of individual issues can be purchased by contacting the EA <strong>Journal</strong>s Customer<br />

Service department.<br />

Zmaj Jovina 12, 11000 Belgrade, Serbia<br />

Ordering information:<br />

Tel: +381 11 2622-357 and 2629-960<br />

Fax: +381 11 2181-471


Author Guidelines<br />

General outline<br />

Authors submitting to the Economic Analysis are requested to email full paper in English. Pictures, if<br />

imported, should be placed separately in the zip file in TIFF, JPG, GIF or CDR format in resolution of<br />

300 dpi.<br />

Manuscripts are blind reviewed with the understanding that they are substantially new and have not<br />

been previously published in whole (excluding conference preceding). Publisher has the copyright to<br />

all published articles.<br />

Practical guidelines<br />

1. The length of the manuscript should not exceed 20 pages (including notes, references, appendices,<br />

tables, figures, charts, etc.). A paper must be written in English in text processor Microsoft Word,<br />

using font Palatino Linotype (size 11), in Latin alphabet, single spacing.<br />

2. Page setup: A4, margins: top 3 cm; bottom 3 cm; left 2,5 cm; right 2,5 cm.<br />

3. Paragraph setup: first line indentation 0,6 cm, paragraph spacing: before 2 pt and after 2 pt.<br />

4. Title: right, bold, size 16.<br />

5. The author’s name: last, middle and first name (bold, size 11) without titles. The authorʹs<br />

affiliation name of institution, city, state, and country should be together with the authorʹs name.<br />

Behind the name of the first author, a footnote should be inserted containing address and email of<br />

the first author.<br />

6. Abstract: italic, size 11, 3 line behind the author’s name, the maximum length of 250 words. Key<br />

words should be 1 line behind the abstract up to ten key words.<br />

7. Avoid endnotes. If they cannot be avoided list them at the end of the manuscript, before the<br />

references.<br />

8. Tables and figures should be numbered (1,2,3 etc.), in italics centred. All tables and figures<br />

(drawings) must be black & white.<br />

9. Structure of the manuscript (only two levels). First heading: left, bold, size 12, before 18 after 9 pt.<br />

Second heading: left indention 0,6 cm, bold, size 12, before 12 after 6 pt.<br />

10. Reference to articles and books in the text: Give full name (first name, middle initial, and last<br />

name) of author(s) and year of publication in the first citation, with page number(s) where<br />

appropriate. For example: Glenn Firebaugh (1999) [first reference]; Firebaugh (1999)<br />

[subsequently]; Andrea Boltho and Gianni Toniolo (1999) [first reference], Boltho and Toniolo<br />

(1999) [subsequently]; Albert Berry, François Bourguignon, and Christian Morrisson (1983) [first<br />

reference], Berry, Bourguignon, and Morrisson (1983) [subsequently]. When more than one work<br />

by the same author is cited, give the last name of author and year of publication in parentheses for<br />

each subsequent citation. When listing a string of references within the text, arrange first in<br />

chronological order, then alphabetically within years. If there are four or more authors, refer to the<br />

first author, followed by et al. and the year; for example: Stefan Fölster et al. (1998). If there is<br />

more than one publication referred to in the same year by the author(s), use the year and a, b, etc.<br />

(example: 1997a, b). References to authors in the text must exactly match those in the Reference<br />

section.<br />

11. List of references (in alphabetical order by authorʹ last names) should be at the end of the<br />

manuscript. Economic analysis use AEA rules for references.<br />

12. Abstracts would be sent to Editor-in-Chief by email


INSTITUTE OF ECONOMIC SCIENCE<br />

Zmaj Jovina 12, 11000 Belgrade<br />

Serbia<br />

Tel. + 381 2622-357; 2629-960<br />

Fax: +381 (11) 2181~471<br />

CIP - Каталогизација у публикацији<br />

Народна библиотека Србије, Београд<br />

33<br />

ECONOMIC Analysis / Editor-in-chief<br />

Mirjana Radović-Marković. - Vol. 42, no. 1<br />

(2009)- . - Belgrade (Zmaj Jovina 12) :<br />

Institute of Economic Sciences, 2009- (Novi<br />

Sad : SP print). - 30 cm<br />

Polugodišnje. - Je nastavak: Economic<br />

analysis and workersʹ management = ISSN<br />

0351-286X<br />

ISSN 1821-2573 = Economic Analysis (Belgrade)<br />

COBISS.SR-ID 169576460

Hooray! Your file is uploaded and ready to be published.

Saved successfully!

Ooh no, something went wrong!